1|Adi 17: The Pastimes of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu in
>|His Youth
2|Chapter 17:
3|The Pastimes of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu in His Youth
4|The Seventeenth Chapter, as summarized by Srila
>|Bhaktivinoda Thakura in his Amrta-pravaha-bhasya, describes
>|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu's pastimes from His sixteenth year
>|until the time He accepted the renounced order of life.
>|Srila Vrndavana dasa Thakura has already vividly described
>|these pastimes in the Caitanya-bhagavata ; therefore Krsna
>|dasa Kaviraja Gosvami describes them only briefly. Vivid
>|descriptions of some portions of His pastimes are seen in
>|this chapter, however, because Vrndavana dasa Thakura has
>|not elaborately described them.
5|In this chapter we shall find descriptions of the mango
>|distribution festival and Lord Caitanya's discourses with
>|Chand Kazi. Finally, the chapter shows that the same son of
>|mother Yasoda, Lord Krsna, tasted four transcendental
>|mellows of devotional service in His form of Sacinandana,
>|the son of mother Saci. To understand Srimati Radharani's
>|ecstatic love for Him, Lord Sri Krsna assumed the form of
>|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu. The attitude of Srimati Radharani
>|is considered the superexcellent devotional mentality. As
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu, Krsna Himself assumed the position of
>|Srimati Radharani to taste Her ecstatic situation. No one
>|else could do this.
6|When Sri Krsna assumed the form of the four-armed Narayana,
>|the gopis showed their respect, but they were not very
>|interested in Him. In the ecstatic love of the gopis, all
>|worshipable forms but Krsna are rejected. Among all the
>|gopis, Srimati Radharani has the highest ecstatic love.
>|When Krsna in His form of Narayana saw Radharani, He could
>|not keep His position as Narayana, and again He assumed the
>|form of Krsna.
7|The King of Vrajabhumi is Nanda Maharaja, and the same
>|person in Navadvipa is Jagannatha Misra, the father of
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu. Similarly, mother Yasoda is the Queen
>|of Vrajabhumi, and in the pastimes of Lord Caitanya she is
>|Sacimata. Therefore the son of Saci is the son of Yasoda.
>|Sri Nityananda occupies an ecstatic position of parental
>|love in servitude and fraternal attraction. Sri Advaita
>|Prabhu exhibits the ecstasy of both fraternity and
>|servitude. All the Lord's other associates, situated in
>|their original love, engage in the service of Lord Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu.
8|The same Absolute Truth who enjoys as Krsna, Syamasundara,
>|who plays His flute and dances with the gopis, sometimes
>|takes birth in a brahmana family and plays the part of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu, accepting the renounced order of life.
>|It appears contradictory that the same Krsna accepted the
>|ecstasy of the gopis, and of course this is very difficult
>|for an ordinary person to understand. But if we accept the
>|inconceivable energy of the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
>|we can understand that everything is possible. There is no
>|need of mundane arguments in this connection, because
>|mundane arguments are meaningless in regard to
>|inconceivable potency.
9|At the end of the Seventeenth Chapter , Srila Krsnadasa
>|Kaviraja Gosvami, following in the footsteps of Srila
>|Vyasadeva, has summarized all the adi-lila pastimes
>|separately.
10|Adi 17.1
11|TEXT 1
12|vande svairadbhuteham tam
13|caitanyam yat-prasadatah
14|yavanah sumanayante
15|krsna-nama-prajalpakah
16|SYNONYMS
17|vande-let me offer my obeisances; svaira-completely
>|independent; adbhuta-and uncommon; iham-whose activities;
>|tam-unto Him; caitanyam-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; yat-of
>|whom; prasadatah-by the mercy; yavanah-even the unclean;
>|sumanayante-are transformed into gentlemen; krsna-nama-of
>|the holy name of Lord Krsna; prajalpakah-taking to the
>|chanting.
18|TRANSLATION
19|Let me offer my respectful obeisances to Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, by whose mercy even unclean yavanas become
>|perfectly well bred gentlemen by chanting the holy name of
>|the Lord. Such is the power of Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
20|PURPORT
21|There is a persistent misunderstanding between caste
>|brahmanas and advanced Vaisnavas, or gosvamis, because
>|caste brahmanas, or smartas, are of the opinion that one
>|cannot become a brahmana unless he changes his body. As we
>|have discussed several times, it is to be understood that
>|by the supremely powerful potency of the Lord, as described
>|by Krsnadasa Kaviraja Gosvami, everything is possible.
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu is as fully independent as Krsna.
>|Therefore no one can interfere with His activities. If He
>|wants, by His mercy He can convert even a yavana, an
>|unclean follower of non-Vedic principles, into a perfectly
>|well behaved gentleman. This is actually happening in our
>|propagation of the Krsna consciousness movement. The
>|members of the present Krsna consciousness movement were
>|not born in India, nor do they belong to the Vedic culture,
>|but within the short time of four or five years they have
>|become such wonderful devotees simply by chanting the
>|Hare Krsna mantra that even in India they are well
>|received as perfectly well behaved Vaisnavas wherever they
>|go.
22|Although less intelligent men cannot understand it, this is
>|the special power of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu. Actually,
>|the body of a Krsna conscious person changes in many ways.
>|Even in the United States, when our devotees chant on the
>|street, American ladies and gentlemen inquire from them
>|whether they are actually Americans because no one could
>|expect Americans to become such nice devotees all of a
>|sudden. Even Christian priests are greatly surprised that
>|all these boys from Jewish and Christian families have
>|joined this Krsna consciousness movement; before joining,
>|they never regarded any principles of religion seriously,
>|but now they have become sincere devotees of the Lord.
>|Everywhere people express this astonishment, and we take
>|great pride in the transcendental behavior of our students.
>|Such wonders are possible, however, only by the mercy of
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. They are not ordinary or mundane.
23|Adi 17.2
24|TEXT 2
25|TEXT
26|jaya jaya sri-caitanya jaya nityananda
27|jayadvaitacandra jaya gaura-bhakta-vrnda
28|SYNONYMS
29|jaya jaya-all glories; sri-caitanya-to Lord Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; jaya-all glories; nityananda-to Lord Nityananda
>|Prabhu; jaya advaita-candra-all glories to Advaita Acarya;
>|jaya gaura-bhakta-vrnda-all glories to the devotees of Lord
>|Caitanya.
30|TRANSLATION
31|All glories to Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu! All glories to
>|Lord Nityananda Prabhu! All glories to Advaita Acarya! And
>|all glories to all the devotees of Lord Caitanya!
32|Adi 17.3
33|TEXT 3
34|TEXT
35|kaisora-lilara sutra karila ganana
36|yauvana-lilara sutra kari anukrama
37|SYNONYMS
38|kaisora-lilara-of the activities before His youth; sutra-
>|synopsis; karila-I have done; ganana-an enumeration;
>|yauvana-lilara-of the pastimes of youth; sutra-synopsis;
>|kari-I enumerate; anukrama-in chronological order.
39|TRANSLATION
40|I have already given a synopsis of the kaisora-lila of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu. Now let me enumerate His youthful
>|pastimes in chronological order.
41|Adi 17.4
42|TEXT 4
43|TEXT
44|vidya-saundarya-sad-vesa-
45|sambhoga-nrtya-kirtanaih
46|prema-nama-pradanais ca
47|gauro divyati yauvane
48|SYNONYMS
49|vidya-education; saundarya-beauty; sat-vesa-nice dress;
>|sambhoga-enjoyment; nrtya-dancing; kirtanaih-by chanting;
>|prema-nama-the holy name of the Lord, which induces one to
>|become a devotee; pradanaih-by distributing; ca-and; gaurah-
>|Lord Sri Gaurasundara; divyati-illuminated; yauvane-in His
>|youth.
50|TRANSLATION
51|Exhibiting His scholarship, beauty and fine dress, Lord
>|Caitanya danced and chanted as He distributed the
>|holy name of the Lord to awaken dormant love of Krsna. Thus
>|Lord Sri Gaurasundara shone in His youthful pastimes.
52|Adi 17.5
53|TEXT 5
54|TEXT
55|yauvana-pravese angera anga vibhusana
56|divya vastra, divya vesa, malya-candana
57|SYNONYMS
58|yauvana-pravese-on the entrance of His youth; angera-of the
>|body; anga-limbs; vibhusana-ornaments; divya-transcendental;
>| vastra-garments; divya-transcendental; vesa-dress; malya-
>|garland; candana-(smeared with) sandalwood pulp.
59|TRANSLATION
60|As He entered His youth, the Lord decorated Himself with
>|ornaments, dressed Himself in fine cloth, garlanded Himself
>|with flowers and smeared Himself with sandalwood.
61|Adi 17.6
62|TEXT 6
63|TEXT
64|vidyara auddhatye kahon na kare ganana
65|sakala pandita jini' kare adhyapana
66|SYNONYMS
67|vidyara auddhatye-because of pride in education; kahon-
>|anyone; na-does not; kare-do; ganana-care; sakala-all;
>|pandita-learned scholars; jini'-conquering; kare-does;
>|adhyapana-studies.
68|TRANSLATION
69|By dint of pride in His education, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu,
>|not caring for anyone else, defeated all kinds of learned
>|scholars while executing His studies.
70|Adi 17.7
71|TEXT 7
72|TEXT
73|vayu-vyadhi-cchale kaila prema parakasa
74|bhakta-gana lana kaila vividha vilasa
75|SYNONYMS
76|vayu-vyadhi-disease caused by disturbance of the air in the
>|body; chale-on the plea of; kaila-made; prema-love of
>|Godhead; parakasa-manifestation; bhakta-gana-the devotees;
>|lana-taking with Him; kaila-did; vividha-varieties of;
>|vilasa-pastimes.
77|TRANSLATION
78|In His youth the Lord exhibited His ecstatic love of Krsna
>|on the plea of disturbances of the bodily airs. Accompanied
>|by His confidential devotees, He enjoyed various pastimes
>|in this way.
79|PURPORT
80|According to Ayur-vedic treatment, the entire physiological
>|system is conducted by three elements, namely vayu, pitta
>|and kapha (air, bile and mucus). Secretions within the body
>|transform into other secretions like blood, urine and stool,
>| but if there are disturbances in the metabolism, the
>|secretions turn into kapha (mucus) by the influence of the
>|air within the body. According to the Ayur-vedic system,
>|when the secretion of bile and formation of mucus disturb
>|the air circulating within the body, fifty-nine varieties
>|of diseases may occur. One such disease is craziness.
81|On the plea of disturbance of the bodily air and metabolism,
>| Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu acted as if crazy. Thus in His
>|school He began to explain the grammar of verbs through
>|Krsna consciousness. Explaining everything in grammar in
>|relationship to Krsna, the Lord induced His students to
>|refrain from worldly education, for it is better to become
>|Krsna conscious and in this way attain the highest
>|perfectional platform of education. On these grounds, Sri
>|Jiva Gosvami later compiled the grammar entitled Hari-
>|namamrta-vyakarana. People in general consider such
>|explanations crazy. Therefore the Lord's purpose in His
>|attitude of craziness was to explain that there is nothing
>|within our experience but Krsna consciousness, for
>|everything may be dovetailed with Krsna consciousness.
>|These pastimes of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu have been very
>|vividly described in the Caitanya-bhagavata, Madhya-lila,
>|Chapter One.
82|Adi 17.8
83|TEXT 8
84|TEXT
85|tabeta karila prabhu gayate gamana
86|isvara-purira sange tathai milana
87|SYNONYMS
88|tabeta-thereafter; karila-did; prabhu-Lord Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; gayate-to Gaya; gamana-travel; isvara-purira
>|sange-with Isvara Puri; tathai-there; milana-meeting.
89|TRANSLATION
90|Thereafter the Lord went to Gaya. There He met Srila Isvara
>|Puri.
91|PURPORT
92|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu went to Gaya to offer respectful
>|oblations to His forefathers. This process is called pinda-
>|dana. In Vedic society, after the death of a relative,
>|especially one's father or mother, one must go to Gaya and
>|there offer oblations to the lotus feet of Lord Visnu.
>|Therefore hundreds and thousands of men gather in Gaya
>|daily to offer such oblations, or sraddha. Following this
>|principle, Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu also went there to
>|offer pinda to His dead father. Fortunately He met Isvara
>|Puri there.
93|Adi 17.9
94|TEXT 9
95|TEXT
96|diksa-anantare haila, premera prakasa
97|dese agamana punah premera vilasa
98|SYNONYMS
99|diksa-initiation; anantare-immediately after; haila-became;
>|premera-of love of Godhead; prakasa-exhibition; dese-in His
>|home country; agamana-coming back; punah-again; premera-of
>|love of God; vilasa-enjoyment.
100|TRANSLATION
101|In Gaya, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu was initiated by Isvara
>|Puri, and immediately afterwards He exhibited signs of love
>|of Godhead. He again displayed such symptoms after
>|returning home.
102|PURPORT
103|When Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu went to Gaya, accompanied by
>|many of His disciples, He became sick on the way. He had
>|such a high fever that He asked His students to bring water
>|that had washed the feet of brahmanas, and when they
>|brought it the Lord drank it and was cured. Therefore
>|everyone should respect the position of a brahmana, as
>|indicated by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. Neither the Lord nor
>|His followers displayed any disrespect to brahmanas.
104|The followers of the Lord must be prepared to offer
>|brahmanas all due respect. But preachers of Lord Caitanya's
>|cult object if someone presents himself as a brahmana
>|without having the necessary qualifications. The followers
>|of Lord Caitanya cannot blindly accept that everyone born
>|in a brahmana family is a brahmana. Therefore one should
>|not indiscriminately follow the Lord's example of showing
>|respect to brahmanas by drinking water that has washed
>|their feet. Gradually the brahmana families have become
>|degraded because of the contamination of Kali-yuga. Thus
>|they misguide people by exploiting their sentiments.
105|Adi 17.10
106|TEXT 10
107|TEXT
108|sacike prema-dana, tabe advaita-milana
109|advaita paila visvarupa-darasana
110|SYNONYMS
111|sacike-unto mother Sacidevi; prema-dana-giving love of
>|Godhead; tabe-thereafter; advaita-with Advaita Acarya;
>|milana-meeting; advaita-Advaita Acarya; paila-received;
>|visva-rupa-of the universal form of the Lord; darasana-
>|vision.
112|TRANSLATION
113|Thereafter the Lord delivered love of Krsna to His mother,
>|Sacidevi, nullifying her offense at the feet of Advaita
>|Acarya. Thus there was a meeting with Advaita Acarya, who
>|later had a vision of the Lord's universal form.
114|PURPORT
115|One day Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu was sitting on the throne
>|of Visnu in the house of Srivasa Prabhu, and in a mood of
>|His own He said, "My mother has offended the lotus feet of
>|Advaita Acarya. Unless she nullifies this offense at the
>|lotus feet of a Vaisnava, it will not be possible for her
>|to achieve love of Krsna." Hearing this, all the devotees
>|went to bring Advaita Acarya there. While coming to see the
>|Lord, Advaita Acarya was glorifying the characteristics of
>|mother Sacidevi, and thus upon arriving He fell down on the
>|ground in ecstasy. Then, under the instruction of Lord
>|Caitanya, Sacidevi took advantage of this situation to
>|touch Advaita Acarya's lotus feet. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu
>|was very much pleased by His mother's action, and He said, "
>|Now My mother's offense at the lotus feet of Advaita Acarya
>|has been rectified, and she may have love of Krsna without
>|difficulty." By this example Lord Caitanya taught everyone
>|that although one may be very much advanced in Krsna
>|consciousness, if one offends the lotus feet of a Vaisnava
>|his advancement will not bear fruit. We should therefore be
>|very cautious not to offend a Vaisnava. Sri
>|Caitanya-caritamrta has described such an offense as
>|follows:
116|yadi vaisnava-aparadha uthe hati mata
117|upade va chinde, tara sukhi' yaya pata
118|(Cc. Madhya 19.156)
119|As a mad elephant may trample all the plants in a garden,
>|so by committing one offense at the lotus feet of a
>|Vaisnava one may spoil all the devotional service he has
>|accumulated in his life.
120|After this incident, one day Advaita Acarya Prabhu
>|requested Caitanya Mahaprabhu to display the universal form
>|He had very kindly shown Arjuna. Lord Caitanya agreed to
>|this proposal, and Advaita Prabhu was fortunate enough to
>|see the universal form of the Lord.
121|Adi 17.11
122|TEXT 11
123|TEXT
124|prabhura abhiseka tabe karila srivasa
125|khate vasi' prabhu kaila aisvarya prakasa
126|SYNONYMS
127|prabhura-of the Lord; abhiseka-worship; tabe-after that;
>|karila-did; srivasa-Srivasa; khate-on the cot;
>|vasi'-sitting; prabhu-Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; kaila-
>|did; aisvarya-opulence; prakasa-manifestation.
128|TRANSLATION
129|Srivasa Thakura then worshiped Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu by
>|the process of abhiseka. Sitting on a cot, the Lord
>|exhibited transcendental opulence.
130|PURPORT
131|Abhiseka is a special function for the installation of the
>|Deity. In this ceremony the Deity is bathed with milk and
>|water and then worshiped and given a change of dress. This
>|abhiseka function was especially observed at the house of
>|Srivasa. All the devotees, according to their means,
>|worshiped the Lord with all kinds of paraphernalia, and the
>|Lord gave benedictions to each devotee according to his
>|desire.
132|Adi 17.12
133|TEXT 12
134|TEXT
135|tabe nityananda-svarupera agamana
136|prabhuke miliya paila sad-bhuja-darsana
137|SYNONYMS
138|tabe-thereafter; nityananda-svarupera-of the Personality of
>|Godhead Nityananda; agamana-appearance; prabhuke-Lord
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; miliya-meeting; paila-obtained; sat-
>|bhuja-darsana-a vision of the six-armed Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu.
139|TRANSLATION
140|After this function at the house of Srivasa Thakura,
>|Nityananda Prabhu appeared, and when He met with Lord
>|Caitanya He got the opportunity to see Him in His six-armed
>|form.
141|PURPORT
142|The form of Sad-bhuja, the six-armed Lord Gaurasundara, is
>|a representation of three incarnations. The form of Sri
>|Ramacandra is symbolized by a bow in one hand and an arrow
>|in another, the form of Lord Sri Krsna is symbolized by a
>|stick and a flute like those generally held by a cowherd
>|boy, and Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu is symbolized by a
>|sannyasa-danda and a kamandalu, or waterpot.
143|Srila Nityananda Prabhu was born in the village of Ekacakra,
>| in the district of Birbhum , as the son of Padmavati and
>|Hadai Pandita. In His childhood He played like Balarama.
>|When He was growing up, a sannyasi came to the house of
>|Hadai Pandita and begged to have the pandita's son
>|as his brahmacari assistant. Hadai Pandita immediately
>|agreed and delivered his son to him, although the
>|separation was greatly shocking, so much so that Hadai lost
>|his life after the separation. Nityananda Prabhu traveled
>|on many pilgrimages with the sannyasi. It is said that for
>|many days He lived at Mathura with him, and at that time He
>|heard about Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu's pastimes in
>|Navadvipa. Therefore He came down to Bengal to see the Lord.
>| When Lord Nityananda came to Navadvipa, He was a guest at
>|the house of Nandana Acarya. Understanding that Nityananda
>|Prabhu had arrived, Lord Caitanya sent His devotees to Him,
>|and thus there was a meeting between Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu and Nityananda Prabhu.
144|Adi 17.13
145|TEXT 13
146|TEXT
147|prathame sad-bhuja tanre dekhaila isvara
148|sankha-cakra-gada-padma-sarnga-venu-dhara
149|SYNONYMS
150|prathame-at first; sat-bhuja-six-armed; tanre-unto Him;
>|dekhaila-showed; isvara-the Lord; sankha-conchshell; cakra-
>|disc; gada-club; padma-lotus flower; sarnga-bow; venu-flute;
>| dhara-carrying.
151|TRANSLATION
152|One day Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu exhibited to Lord
>|Nityananda Prabhu a six-armed form bearing a conchshell,
>|disc, club, lotus flower, bow and flute.
153|Adi 17.14
154|TEXT 14
155|TEXT
156|tabe catur-bhuja haila, tina anga vakra
157|dui haste venu bajaya, duye sankha-cakra
158|SYNONYMS
159|tabe-thereafter; catuh-bhuja-four-armed; haila-became; tina-
>|three; anga-body; vakra-curved; dui haste-in two hands;
>|venu bajaya-blowing the flute; duye-in two (hands); sankha-
>|cakra-conchshell and disc.
160|TRANSLATION
161|Thereafter the Lord showed Him His four-armed form,
>|standing in a three-curved posture. With two hands He
>|played upon a flute, and in the other two He carried a
>|conchshell and disc.
162|Adi 17.15
163|TEXT 15
164|TEXT
165|tabe ta' dvi-bhuja kevala vamsi-vadana
166|syama-anga pita-vastra vrajendra-nandana
167|SYNONYMS
168|tabe-thereafter; ta'-certainly; dvi-bhuja-two-handed;
>|kevala-only; vamsi-flute; vadana-on the mouth; syama-bluish;
>| anga-body; pita-vastra-yellow dress; vrajendra-nandana-the
>|son of Nanda Maharaja.
169|TRANSLATION
170|Finally the Lord showed Nityananda Prabhu His two-armed
>|form of Krsna, the son of Maharaja Nanda, simply playing on
>|His flute, His bluish body dressed in yellow garments.
171|PURPORT
172|Sri Caitanya-mangala vividly elaborates upon this
>|description.
173|Adi 17.16
174|TEXT 16
175|TEXT
176|tabe nityananda-gosanira vyasa-pujana
177|nityanandavese kaila musala dharana
178|SYNONYMS
179|tabe-thereafter; nityananda-Nityananda;
>|gosanira-of the Lord; vyasa-pujana-worshiping Vyasadeva or
>|the spiritual master; nityananda-avese-in the ecstasy of
>|becoming Nityananda; kaila-did; musala dharana-carrying a
>|plowlike weapon called a musala.
180|TRANSLATION
181|Nityananda Prabhu then arranged to offer Vyasa-puja, or
>|worship of the spiritual master, to Lord Sri Gaurasundara.
>|But Lord Caitanya carried the plowlike weapon called musala
>|in the ecstasy of being Nityananda Prabhu.
182|PURPORT
183|By the order of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, Nityananda Prabhu
>|arranged for the Vyasa-puja of the Lord on the night of the
>|full moon. He arranged for the Vyasa-puja, or guru-puja,
>|through the agency of Vyasadeva. Since Vyasadeva is the
>|original guru (spiritual master) of all who follow the
>|Vedic principles, worship of the spiritual master is called
>|Vyasa-puja. Nityananda Prabhu arranged for the Vyasa-puja,
>|and sankirtana was going on, but when He tried to put a
>|garland on the shoulder of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, He saw
>|Himself in Lord Caitanya. There is no difference between
>|the spiritual positions of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu and
>|Nityananda Prabhu, or Krsna and Balarama. All of Them are
>|but different manifestations of the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead. During this special ceremony, all the devotees of
>|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu could understand that there is no
>|difference between Lord Caitanya and Nityananda Prabhu.
184|Adi 17.17
185|TEXT 17
186|TEXT
187|tabe saci dekhila, rama-krsna-dui bhai
188|tabe nistarila prabhu jagai-madhai
189|SYNONYMS
190|tabe-thereafter; saci-mother Sacidevi; dekhila-saw; rama-
>|krsna-Lord Krsna and Lord Balarama; dui bhai-two brothers;
>|tabe-thereafter; nistarila-delivered; prabhu-the Lord;
>|jagai-madhai-the two brothers Jagai and Madhai.
191|TRANSLATION
192|Thereafter mother Sacidevi saw the brothers Krsna and
>|Balarama in Their manifestation of Lord Caitanya and
>|Nityananda. Then the Lord delivered the two brothers Jagai
>|and Madhai.
193|PURPORT
194|One night Sacidevi dreamt that the Deities in her house,
>|Krsna and Balarama, had taken the forms of Caitanya and
>|Nityananda and were fighting one another, as children do,
>|to eat the naivedya, or offering to the Deities. the
>|next day, by the will of Lord Caitanya, Sacidevi invited
>|Nityananda to take prasadam at her house. Thus Visvambhara (
>|Lord Caitanya) and Nityananda were eating together, and
>|Sacidevi realized that They were none other than Krsna and
>|Balarama. Seeing this, she fainted.
195|Jagai and Madhai were two brothers born in Navadvipa in a
>|respectable brahmana family who later became addicted to
>|all kinds of sinful activities. By the order of Lord
>|Caitanya, both Nityananda Prabhu and Haridasa Thakura used
>|to preach the cult of Krsna consciousness door to door. In
>|the course of such preaching they found Jagai and Madhai,
>|two maddened drunken brothers, who, upon seeing them, began
>|to chase them. On the next day, Madhai struck Nityananda
>|Prabhu on the head with a piece of earthen pot, thus
>|drawing blood. When Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu heard of this,
>|He immediately came to the spot, ready to punish both
>|brothers, but when the all-merciful Lord Gauranga saw Jagai'
>|s repentant behavior, He immediately embraced him. By
>|seeing the Supreme Personality of Godhead face to face and
>|embracing Him, both the sinful brothers were at once
>|cleansed. Thus they received initiation into the chanting
>|of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra from the Lord and were
>|delivered.
196|Adi 17.18
197|TEXT 18
198|TEXT
199|tabe sapta-prahara chila prabhu bhavavese
200|yatha tatha bhakta-gana dekhila visese
201|SYNONYMS
202|tabe-thereafter; sapta-prahara-twenty-one hours; chila-
>|remained; prabhu-the Lord; bhava-avese-in ecstasy; yatha-
>|anywhere; tatha-everywhere; bhakta-gana-the devotees;
>|dekhila-saw; visese-specifically.
203|TRANSLATION
204|After this incident, the Lord remained in an ecstatic
>|position for twenty-one hours, and all the devotees saw His
>|specific pastimes.
205|PURPORT
206|In the Deity's room there must be a bed for the Deity
>|behind the His throne. (This system should immediately
>|be introduced in all our centers. It does not matter
>|whether the bed is big or small; it should be of a size the
>|Deity room can conveniently accommodate, but there must be
>|at least a small bed.) One day in the house of Srivasa
>|Thakura, Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu sat down on the bed of
>|Visnu, and all the devotees worshiped Him with the Vedic
>|mantras of the Purusa-sukta, beginning with sahasra-sirsa
>|purusah sahasraksah sahasra-pat. This veda-stuti should
>|also be introduced, if possible, for installations of
>|Deities. While bathing the Deity, all the priests and
>|devotees must chant this Purusa-sukta and offer the
>|appropriate paraphernalia for worshiping the Deity, such as
>|flowers, fruits, incense, arati paraphernalia, naivedya,
>|vastra and ornaments. All the devotees worshiped Lord
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu in this way, and the Lord remained in
>|ecstasy for seven praharas, or twenty-one hours. He took
>|this opportunity to show the devotees that He is the
>|original Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, who is the
>|source of all other incarnations, as confirmed in the
>|Bhagavad-gita (10.8): aham sarvasya prabhavo mattah sarvam
>|pravartate. All the different forms of the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, or visnu-tattva, emanate from the
>|body of Lord Krsna. Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu exposed all
>|the private desires of the devotees, and thus all of them
>|became fully confident that Lord Caitanya is the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead.
207|Some devotees call this exhibition of ecstasy by the Lord
>|sata-prahariya bhava, or "the ecstasy of twenty-one hours,"
>|and others call it mahabhava-prakasa or maha-prakasa. There
>|is a description of this sata-prahariya bhava in the
>|Caitanya- bhagavata , Madhya-khanda, Chapter Nine, which
>|mentions that Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu blessed a maidservant
>|named Duhkhi with the name Sukhi. He called for Kholaveca
>|Sridhara and showed him His maha-prakasa. Then He called
>|for Murari Gupta and showed him His feature as Lord
>|Ramacandra. He offered His blessings to Haridasa Thakura,
>|and at this time He also asked Advaita Prabhu to explain
>|the Bhagavad-gita as it is (gitara satya-patha) and showed
>|special favor to Mukunda.
208|Adi 17.19
209|TEXT 19
210|TEXT
211|varaha-avesa haila murari-bhavane
212|tanra skandhe cadi' prabhu nacila angane
213|SYNONYMS
214|varaha-avesa-the ecstasy of becoming Varahadeva; haila-
>|became; murari-bhavane-in the house of Murari Gupta; tanra
>|skandhe-on the shoulders of Murari Gupta; cadi'-riding;
>|prabhu-the Lord; nacila-danced; angane-in the yard.
215|TRANSLATION
216|One day Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu felt the ecstasy of the
>|boar incarnation and got up on the shoulders of Murari
>|Gupta. Thus they both danced in Murari Gupta's courtyard.
217|PURPORT
218|One day Caitanya Mahaprabhu began to cry out, "Sukara!
>|Sukara!" Thus crying out for the boar incarnation of the
>|Lord, He assumed His form as the boar incarnation and got
>|up on the shoulders of Murari Gupta. He carried a small
>|gadu, a small waterpot with a nozzle, and thus He
>|symbolically picked up the earth from the depths of the
>|ocean, for this is the pastime of Lord Varaha.
219|Adi 17.20
220|TEXT 20
221|TEXT
222|tabe suklambarera kaila tandula-bhaksana
223|'harer nama' slokera kaila artha vivarana
224|SYNONYMS
225|tabe-thereafter; suklambarera-of Suklambara Brahmacari;
>|kaila-did; tandula-raw rice; bhaksana-eating; harer nama
>|slokera-of the verse celebrated as such; kaila-did; artha-
>|of the meaning; vivarana-explanation.
226|TRANSLATION
227|After this incident the Lord ate raw rice given by
>|Suklambara Brahmacari and explained very elaborately the
>|import of the "harer nama" sloka mentioned in the Brhan-
>|naradiya Purana.
228|PURPORT
229|Suklambara Brahmacari resided in Navadvipa on the bank of
>|the Ganges. When Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu was dancing in
>|ecstasy, he approached the Lord with a begging bag
>|containing rice. The Lord was so pleased with His devotee
>|that He immediately snatched the bag and began
>|to eat the raw rice. No one forbade Him, and thus He
>|finished the entire supply of rice.
230|Adi 17.21
231|TEXT 21
232|TEXT
233|harer nama harer nama
234|harer namaiva kevalam
235|kalau nasty eva nasty eva
236|nasty eva gatir anyatha
237|SYNONYMS
238|hareh nama-the holy name of the Lord; hareh nama-the holy
>|name of the Lord; hareh nama-the holy name of the Lord; eva-
>|certainly; kevalam-only; kalau-in the Age of Kali; na asti-
>|there is none; eva-certainly; na asti-there is none; eva-
>|certainly; na asti-there is none; eva-certainly; gatih-
>|destination; anyatha-otherwise.
239|TRANSLATION
240|"'In this Age of Kali there is no other means, no other
>|means, no other means for self-realization than chanting
>|the holy name, chanting the holy name, chanting the holy
>|name of Lord Hari.'
241|Adi 17.22
242|TEXT 22
243|TEXT
244|kali-kale nama-rupe krsna-avatara
245|nama haite haya sarva-jagat-nistara
246|SYNONYMS
247|kali-kale-in this Age of Kali; nama-rupe-in the form of the
>|holy name; krsna-Lord Krsna; avatara-incarnation; nama-holy
>|name; haite-from; haya-becomes; sarva-all; jagat-of the
>|world; nistara-deliverance.
248|TRANSLATION
249|"In this Age of Kali, the holy name of the Lord, the Hare
>|Krsna maha-mantra, is the incarnation of Lord Krsna. Simply
>|by chanting the holy name, one associates with the Lord
>|directly. Anyone who does this is certainly delivered.
250|Adi 17.23
251|TEXT 23
252|TEXT
253|dardhya lagi' 'harer nama'-ukti tina-vara
254|jada loka bujhaite punah 'eva'-kara
255|SYNONYMS
256|dardhya lagi'-in the matter of emphasizing; harer nama-of
>|the holy name of Lord Hari; ukti-there is utterance; tina-
>|vara-three times; jada loka-ordinary common people;
>|bujhaite-just to make them understand; punah-again; eva-
>|kara-the word eva, or "certainly."
257|TRANSLATION
258|"This verse repeats the word 'eva' ['certainly'] three
>|times for emphasis, and it also three times repeats 'harer
>|nama' ['the holy name of the Lord'], just to make common
>|people understand.
259|PURPORT
260|To emphasize something to an ordinary person, one may
>|repeat it three times, just as one might say, "You must do
>|this! You must do this! You must do this!" Thus the Brhan-
>|naradiya Purana repeatedly emphasizes the chanting of the
>|holy name so that people may take it seriously and thus
>|free themselves from the clutches of maya. It is our
>|practical experience in the Krsna consciousness movement
>|all over the world that many millions of people are
>|factually coming to the spiritual stage of life simply by
>|chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra regularly, according to
>|the prescribed principles. Therefore our request to all our
>|students is that they daily chant at least sixteen rounds
>|of this harer nama maha-mantra [Cc. Adi 17.21]
>|offenselessly, following the regulative principles. Thus
>|their success will be assured without a doubt.
261|Adi 17.24
262|TEXT 24
263|TEXT
264|'kevala'-sabde punarapi niscaya-karana
265|jnana-yoga-tapa-karma-adi nivarana
266|SYNONYMS
267|'kevala'-sabde-by the word kevala, or "only"; punarapi-
>|again; niscaya-karana-final decision; jnana-cultivation of
>|knowledge; yoga-practice of the mystic yoga system; tapa-
>|austerity; karma-fruitive activities; adi-and so on;
>|nivarana-prohibition.
268|TRANSLATION
269|"The use of the word 'kevala' ['only'] prohibits all other
>|processes, such as the cultivation of knowledge, practice
>|of mystic yoga, or performance of austerities and fruitive
>|activities.
270|PURPORT
271|Our Krsna consciousness movement stresses the chanting of
>|the Hare Krsna mantra only, whereas those who do not know
>|the secret of success for this Age of Kali unnecessarily
>|indulge in the cultivation of knowledge, the practice of
>|mystic yoga or the performance of fruitive activities or
>|useless austerities. They are simply wasting their time and
>|misleading their followers. When we point this out very
>|plainly to an audience, members of opposing groups become
>|angry at us. But according to the injunctions of the
>|sastras, we cannot make compromises with these so-called
>|jnanis, yogis, karmis and tapasvis. When they say they are
>|as good as we are, we must say that only we are good and
>|that they are not good. This is not our obstinacy; it is
>|the injunction of the sastras. We must not deviate from the
>|injunctions of the sastras. This is confirmed in the next
>|verse of the Caitanya-caritamrta.
272|Adi 17.25
273|TEXT 25
274|TEXT
275|anyatha ye mane, tara nahika nistara
276|nahi, nahi, nahi-e tina 'eva'-kara
277|SYNONYMS
278|anyatha-otherwise; ye-anyone who; mane-accepts; tara-of him;
>| nahika-there is no; nistara-deliverance; nahi nahi nahi-
>|there is nothing else, nothing else, nothing else; e-in
>|this; tina-three; eva-kara-bearing the meaning of emphasis.
279|TRANSLATION
280|"This verse clearly states that anyone who accepts any
>|other path cannot be delivered. This is the reason for the
>|triple repetition 'nothing else, nothing else, nothing else,
>|' which emphasizes the real process of self-realization.
281|Adi 17.26
282|TEXT 26
283|TEXT
284|trna haite nica hana sada labe nama
285|apani nirabhimani, anye dibe mana
286|SYNONYMS
287|trna-grass; haite-than; nica-lower; hana-becoming; sada-
>|always; labe-chant; nama-the holy name; apani-personally;
>|nirabhimani-without honor; anye-unto others; dibe-you
>|should give; mana-all respect.
288|TRANSLATION
289|"To chant the holy name always, one should be humbler than
>|the grass in the street and devoid of all desire for
>|personal honor, but one should offer others all respectful
>|obeisances.
290|Adi 17.27
291|TEXT 27
292|TEXT
293|taru-sama sahisnuta vaisnava karibe
294|bhartsana-tadane kake kichu na balibe
295|SYNONYMS
296|taru-sama-like a tree; sahisnuta-forbearance; vaisnava-
>|devotee; karibe-should practice; bhartsana-rebuking; tadane-
>|chastising; kake-unto anyone; kichu-something; na-not;
>|balibe-will utter.
297|TRANSLATION
298|"A devotee engaged in chanting the holy name of the Lord
>|should practice forbearance like that of a tree. Even if
>|rebuked or chastised, he should not say anything to others
>|to retaliate.
299|Adi 17.28
300|TEXT 28
301|TEXT
302|katileha taru yena kichu na bolaya
303|sukaiya mare, tabu jala na magaya
304|SYNONYMS
305|katileha-even being cut; taru-the tree; yena-as; kichu-
>|something; na-not; bolaya-says; sukaiya-drying up; mare-
>|dies; tabu-still; jala-water; na-does not; magaya-ask for.
306|TRANSLATION
307|"For even if one cuts a tree, it never protests, and even
>|if it is drying up and dying, it does not ask anyone for
>|water.
308|PURPORT
309|This practice of forbearance (taror iva sahisnuna) is very
>|difficult, but when one actually engages in chanting the
>|Hare Krsna mantra, the quality of forbearance automatically
>|develops. A person advanced in spiritual consciousness
>|through the chanting of the Hare Krsna mantra need not
>|practice to develop it separately, for a devotee develops
>|all good qualities simply by chanting the Hare Krsna mantra
>|regularly.
310|Adi 17.29
311|TEXT 29
312|TEXT
313|ei-mata vaisnava kare kichu na magiba
314|ayacita-vrtti, kimva saka-phala khaiba
315|SYNONYMS
316|ei-mata-in this way; vaisnava-a devotee; kare-from anyone;
>|kichu-anything; na-not; magiba-shall ask for; ayacita-vrtti-
>|the profession of not asking for anything; kimva-or; saka-
>|vegetables; phala-fruits; khaiba-shall eat.
317|TRANSLATION
318|"Thus a Vaisnava should not ask anything from anyone else.
>|If someone gives him something without being asked, he
>|should accept it, but if nothing comes, a Vaisnava should
>|be satisfied to eat whatever vegetables and fruits are
>|easily available.
319|Adi 17.30
320|TEXT 30
321|TEXT
322|sada nama la-iba, yatha-labhete santosa
323|eita acara kare bhakti-dharma-posa
324|SYNONYMS
325|sada-always; nama-the holy name; la-iba-one should chant;
>|yatha-inasmuch as; labhete-gains; santosa-satisfaction;
>|eita-this; acara-behavior; kare-does; bhakti-dharma-of
>|devotional service; posa-maintenance.
326|TRANSLATION
327|"One should strictly follow the principle of always
>|chanting the holy name, and one should be satisfied with
>|whatever he gets easily. Such devotional behavior solidly
>|maintains one's devotional service.
328|Adi 17.31
329|TEXT 31
330|TEXT
331|trnad api su-nicena
332|taror iva sahisnuna
333|amanina mana-dena
334|kirtaniyah sada harih
335|SYNONYMS
336|trnat api-than downtrodden grass; su-nicena-being lower;
>|taroh-than a tree; iva-like; sahisnuna-with tolerance;
>|amanina-without being puffed up by false pride; mana-dena-
>|giving respect to all; kirtaniyah-to be chanted; sada-
>|always; harih-the holy name of the Lord.
337|TRANSLATION
338|"One who thinks himself lower than the grass, who is more
>|tolerant than a tree, and who does not expect personal
>|honor yet is always prepared to give all respect to others
>|can very easily always chant the holy name of the Lord."
339|PURPORT
340|The grass is specifically mentioned in this verse because
>|everyone tramples upon it yet the grass never protests.
>|This example indicates that a spiritual master or leader
>|should not be proud of his position; being always humbler
>|than an ordinary common man, he should go on preaching the
>|cult of Caitanya Mahaprabhu by chanting the Hare Krsna
>|mantra.
341|Adi 17.32
342|TEXT 32
343|TEXT
344|urdhva-bahu kari' kahon, suna, sarva-loka
345|nama-sutre ganthi' para kanthe ei sloka
346|SYNONYMS
347|urdhva-bahu-raising my hands; kari'-doing so; kahon-I
>|declare; suna-please hear; sarva-loka-all persons; nama-of
>|the holy name; sutre-on the thread; ganthi-stringing; para-
>|get it; kanthe-on the neck; ei-this; sloka-verse.
348|TRANSLATION
349|Raising my hands, I declare, "Everyone please hear me!
>|String this verse on the thread of the holy name and wear
>|it on your neck for continuous remembrance."
350|PURPORT
351|When chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra, in the beginning
>|one may commit many offenses, which are called namabhasa
>|and nama-aparadha. In this stage there is no possibility of
>|achieving perfect love of Krsna by chanting the Hare Krsna
>|maha-mantra. Therefore one must chant the Hare Krsna maha-
>|mantra according to the principles of the above verse,
>|trnad api su-nicena taror iva sahisnuna. One should note in
>|this connection that chanting involves the activities of
>|the upper and lower lips as well as the tongue. All three
>|must be engaged in chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra. The
>|words "Hare Krsna" should be very distinctly pronounced and
>|heard. Sometimes one mechanically produces a hissing sound
>|instead of chanting with the proper pronunciation with the
>|help of the lips and tongue. Chanting is very simple, but
>|one must practice it seriously. Therefore the author of Sri
>|Caitanya-caritamrta, Krsnadasa Kaviraja Gosvami, advises
>|everyone to keep this verse always strung about his neck.
352|Adi 17.33
353|TEXT 33
354|TEXT
355|prabhu-ajnaya kara ei sloka acarana
356|avasya paibe tabe sri-krsna-carana
357|SYNONYMS
358|prabhu-of the Lord; ajnaya-on the order; kara-do; ei sloka-
>|of this verse; acarana-practice; avasya-certainly; paibe-he
>|will get; tabe-afterwards; sri-krsna-carana-the lotus feet
>|of Lord Krsna.
359|TRANSLATION
360|One must strictly follow the principles given by Lord
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu in this verse. If one simply follows in
>|the footsteps of Lord Caitanya and the Gosvamis, certainly
>|he will achieve the ultimate goal of life, the lotus feet
>|of Sri Krsna.
361|Adi 17.34
362|TEXT 34
363|TEXT
364|tabe prabhu srivasera grhe nirantara
365|ratre sankirtana kaila eka samvatsara
366|SYNONYMS
367|tabe-thereafter; prabhu-the Lord, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu;
>|srivasera-of Srivasa Thakura; grhe-in the home; nirantara-
>|always; ratre-at night; sankirtana-congregational chanting
>|of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra; kaila-performed; eka
>|samvatsara-one full year.
368|TRANSLATION
369|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu regularly led congregational
>|chanting of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra in the house of
>|Srivasa Thakura every night for one full year.
370|Adi 17.35
371|TEXT 35
372|TEXT
373|kapata diya kirtana kare parama avese
374|pasandi hasite aise, na paya pravese
375|SYNONYMS
376|kapata-door; diya-closing; kirtana-chanting; kare-performed;
>| parama-very high; avese-in an ecstatic condition; pasandi-
>|nonbelievers; hasite-to laugh; aise-come; na-does not; paya-
>|get; pravese-entrance.
377|TRANSLATION
378|This ecstatic chanting was performed with the doors closed
>|so that nonbelievers who came to make fun could not gain
>|entrance.
379|PURPORT
380|Chanting of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra is open to everyone,
>|but sometimes nonbelievers come to disturb the ceremony of
>|chanting. It is indicated herein that under such
>|circumstances the temple doors should be closed. Only bona
>|fide chanters should be admitted; others should not. But
>|when there is large-scale congregational chanting of the
>|Hare Krsna maha-mantra, we keep our temples open for
>|everyone to join, and by the grace of Lord Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu this policy has given good results.
381|Adi 17.36
382|TEXT 36
383|TEXT
384|kirtana suni' bahire tara jvali' pudi' mare
385|srivasere duhkha dite nana yukti kare
386|SYNONYMS
387|kirtana suni'-after hearing the chanting; bahire-outside;
>|tara-the nonbelievers; jvali'-burned; pudi'-to ashes; mare-
>|die; srivasere-unto Srivasa Thakura; duhkha-troubles; dite-
>|to give; nana-various; yukti-plans; kare-do.
388|TRANSLATION
389|Thus the nonbelievers almost burned to ashes and died out
>|of envy. To retaliate, they planned various ways to give
>|trouble to Srivasa Thakura.
390|Adi 17.38
391|TEXTS 37–38
392|TEXT
393|eka-dina vipra, nama-'gopala capala'
394|pasandi-pradhana sei durmukha, vacala
395|bhavani-pujara saba samagri lana
396|ratre srivasera dvare sthana lepana
397|SYNONYMS
398|eka-dina-one day; vipra-one brahmana; nama-named; gopala
>|capala-Gopala Capala; pasandi-pradhana-the
>|chief of the nonbelievers; sei-he; durmukha-ferocious,
>|using strong words; vacala-talkative; bhavani-pujara-for
>|worshiping the goddess Bhavani; saba-all; samagri-
>|ingredients, paraphernalia; lana-taking; ratre-at night;
>|srivasera-of Srivasa Thakura; dvare-on the door; sthana-the
>|place; lepana-smearing.
399|TRANSLATION
400|One night while kirtana was going on inside Srivasa Thakura'
>|s house, a brahmana named Gopala Capala, the chief of the
>|nonbelievers, who was talkative and very rough in his
>|speech, placed all the paraphernalia for worshiping the
>|goddess Durga outside Srivasa Thakura's door.
401|PURPORT
402|This brahmana, Gopala Capala, wanted to defame Srivasa
>|Thakura by proving that he was actually a sakta, or a
>|worshiper of Bhavani, the goddess Durga, but was externally
>|posing as a Vaisnava. In Bengal there is perpetual
>|competition between the devotees of goddess Kali and the
>|devotees of Lord Krsna. Generally Bengalis, especially
>|those who are meat-eaters and drunkards, are very much
>|attached to worshiping the goddesses Durga, Kali, Sitala
>|and Candi. Such devotees, who are known as saktas, or
>|worshipers of the sakti-tattva, are always envious of
>|Vaisnavas. Since Srivasa Thakura was a well-known and
>|respected Vaisnava in Navadvipa, Gopala Capala wanted to
>|reduce his prestige by bringing him down to the platform of
>|the saktas. Therefore outside Srivasa Thakura's door he
>|placed various paraphernalia for worshiping Bhavani, the
>|wife of Lord Siva, such as a red flower, a plantain leaf, a
>|pot of wine, and reddish sandalwood paste. In the morning,
>|when Srivasa Thakura saw all this paraphernalia in front of
>|his door, he called for the respectable gentlemen of the
>|neighborhood and showed them that at night he was
>|worshiping Bhavani. Very sorry, these gentlemen called
>|for a sweeper to cleanse the place and purify it by
>|sprinkling water and cow dung there. This incident
>|concerning Gopala Capala is not mentioned in the Caitanya-
>|bhagavata.
403|Adi 17.39
404|TEXT 39
405|TEXT
406|kalara pata upare thuila oda-phula
407|haridra, sindura ara rakta-candana, tandula
408|SYNONYMS
409|kalara pata-a banana leaf; upare-upon it; thuila-placed;
>|oda-phula-a particular type of flower; haridra-turmeric;
>|sindura-vermilion; ara-and; rakta-candana-red sandalwood;
>|tandula-rice.
410|TRANSLATION
411|On the upper portion of a plantain leaf he placed such
>|paraphernalia for worship as oda-phula, turmeric, vermilion,
>| red sandalwood and rice.
412|Adi 17.40
413|TEXT 40
414|TEXT
415|madya-bhanda-pase dhari' nija-ghare gela
416|pratah-kale srivasa taha ta' dekhila
417|SYNONYMS
418|madya-bhanda-a pot of wine; pase-by the side of; dhari'-
>|placing; nija-ghare-to his own home; gela-went; pratah-kale-
>|in the morning; srivasa-Srivasa Thakura; taha-all those
>|things; ta'-certainly; dekhila-saw.
419|TRANSLATION
420|He placed a pot of wine beside all this, and in the morning
>|when Srivasa Thakura opened his door he saw this
>|paraphernalia.
421|Adi 17.41
422|TEXT 41
423|TEXT
424|bada bada loka saba anila bolaiya
425|sabare kahe srivasa hasiya hasiya
426|SYNONYMS
427|bada bada-respectable; loka-persons; saba-all; anila-
>|brought them; bolaiya-causing to be called; sabare-to
>|everyone; kahe-addresses; srivasa-Srivasa Thakura; hasiya
>|hasiya-while smiling.
428|TRANSLATION
429|Srivasa Thakura called for all the respectable gentlemen of
>|the neighborhood and smilingly addressed them as follows.
430|Adi 17.42
431|TEXT 42
432|TEXT
433|nitya ratre kari ami bhavani-pujana
434|amara mahima dekha, brahmana-sajjana
435|SYNONYMS
436|nitya ratre-every night; kari-I do; ami-I; bhavani-pujana-
>|worship of Bhavani, the wife of Lord Siva; amara-my; mahima-
>|glories; dekha-you see; brahmana-sat-jana-all respectable
>|brahmanas.
437|TRANSLATION
438|"Gentlemen, every night I worship the goddess Bhavani.
>|Since the paraphernalia for the worship is present here,
>|now all you respectable brahmanas and members of the higher
>|castes can understand my position."
439|PURPORT
440|According to the Vedic system there are four castes-the
>|brahmanas, ksatriyas, vaisyas and sudras-and below them are
>|the pancamas (literally, "members of the fifth group"), who
>|are lower than the sudras. The higher castes-the brahmanas,
>|the ksatriyas and even the vaisyas-were known as brahmana-
>|saj-jana. The brahmanas especially were known as saj-
>|jana, or respectable gentlemen who guided the entire
>|society. If there were disputes in the village, people
>|would approach these respectable brahmanas to settle them.
>|Now it is very difficult to find such brahmanas and saj-
>|janas, and thus every village and town is so disrupted that
>|there is no peace and happiness anywhere. To revive a fully
>|cultured civilization, the scientific division of society
>|into brahmanas, ksatriyas, vaisyas and sudras must be
>|introduced all over the world. Unless some people are
>|trained as brahmanas, there cannot be peace in human
>|society.
441|Adi 17.43
442|TEXT 43
443|TEXT
444|tabe saba sista-loka kare hahakara
445|aiche karma hetha kaila kon duracara
446|SYNONYMS
447|tabe-thereafter; saba-all; sista-loka-gentlemen; kare-
>|exclaimed; haha-kara-alas, alas; aiche-such; karma-
>|activities; hetha-here; kaila-did; kon-who; duracara-sinful
>|person.
448|TRANSLATION
449|Then all the assembled gentlemen exclaimed, "What is this?
>|What is this? Who has performed such mischievous activities?
>| Who is that sinful man?"
450|Adi 17.44
451|TEXT 44
452|TEXT
453|hadike aniya saba dura karaila
454|jala-gomaya diya sei sthana lepaila
455|SYNONYMS
456|hadike-a sweeper; aniya-calling; saba-all; dura karaila-
>|caused to be thrown far; jala-water; gomaya-cow dung; diya-
>|mixing; sei-that; sthana-place; lepaila-caused to be
>|smeared over.
457|TRANSLATION
458|They called for a sweeper [hadi], who threw all the items
>|of worship far away and cleansed the place by mopping it
>|with a mixture of water and cow dung.
459|PURPORT
460|The men in Vedic society who engage in public sanitary
>|activities like picking up stool and sweeping the street
>|are called hadis. Sometimes they are untouchable,
>|especially when engaged in their profession, yet such hadis
>|also have the right to become devotees. This is established
>|by Sri Bhagavad-gita (9.32), where the Lord declares:
461|mam hi partha vyapasritya ye 'pi syuh papa-yonayah
462|striyo vaisyas tatha sudras te 'pi yanti param gatim
>|
463|"O son of Prtha, those who take shelter in Me, though
>|they be of lower birth-women, vaisyas [merchants], and
>|sudras [workers]-can attain the supreme destination."
464|There are many untouchables of the lower caste in
>|India, but according to Vaisnava principles everyone is
>|welcome to accept this Krsna consciousness movement on the
>|spiritual platform of life and thus be freed from trouble.
>|Neither equality nor fraternity is possible on the material
>|platform.
465|When Lord Caitanya declares trnad api su-nicena
>|taror iva sahisnuna, He indicates that one must be
>|above the material conception of life. When one thoroughly
>|understands that he is not the material body but a
>|spiritual soul, he is even humbler than a man of the lower
>|castes , for he is spiritually elevated. Such
>|humility, in which one thinks himself lower than the
>|grass, is called su- nicatva , and being more
>|tolerant than a tree is called sahisnutva, forbearance.
>|Being situated in devotional service, not caring for
>|the material conception of life, is called amanitva,
>|indifference to material respect; yet a devotee thus
>|situated is called mana-da, for he is prepared to give
>|honor to others without hesitation.
466|Mahatma Gandhi started the hari -jana movement
>|to purify the untouchables, but he was a failure
>|because he thought that one could become a hari-
>|jana, a personal associate of the Lord, through some kind
>|of material adjustment. That is not possible . Unless
>|one fully realizes that he is not the body but
>|is a spiritual soul, there is no question of his
>|becoming a hari-jana. Those who do not follow in the
>|footsteps of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu and His disciplic
>|succession cannot distinguish between matter and spirit,
>|and therefore all their ideas are but a mixed-up hodgepodge
>|of problems. They are virtually lost in the
>|bewildering network of Mayadevi.
467|Adi 17.45
468|TEXT 45
469|TEXT
470|tina dina rahi' sei gopala-capala
471|sarvange ha-ila kustha, vahe rakta-dhara
472|SYNONYMS
473|tina dina-three days; rahi'-remaining in that way; sei-that;
>| gopala-capala-Gopala Capala; sarva-ange-all
>|over the body; ha-ila-became visible; kustha-leprosy; vahe-
>|discharging; rakta-dhara-a flow of blood.
474|TRANSLATION
475|After three days, leprosy attacked Gopala Capala, and blood
>|oozed from sores all over his body.
476|Adi 17.46
477|TEXT 46
478|TEXT
479|sarvanga bedila kite, kate nirantara
480|asahya vedana, duhkhe jvalaye antara
481|SYNONYMS
482|sarva-anga-all over the body; bedila-became covered; kite-
>|by insects; kate-biting; nirantara-always; asahya-
>|unbearable; vedana-pain; duhkhe-in unhappiness; jvalaye-
>|burns; antara-without cessation.
483|TRANSLATION
484|Incessantly covered with germs and insects biting him all
>|over his body, Gopala Capala felt unbearable pain. His
>|entire body burned in distress.
485|Adi 17.47
486|TEXT 47
487|TEXT
488|ganga-ghate vrksa-tale rahe ta' vasiya
489|eka dina bale kichu prabhuke dekhiya
490|SYNONYMS
491|ganga-ghate-on the bank of the Ganges; vrksa-tale-
>|underneath a tree; rahe-remains; ta'-certainly; vasiya-
>|sitting; eka dina-one day; bale-says; kichu-something;
>|prabhuke-the Lord; dekhiya-seeing.
492|TRANSLATION
493|Since leprosy is an infectious disease, Gopala Capala left
>|the village to sit down on the bank of the Ganges
>|underneath a tree. One day, however, he saw Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu passing by and spoke to Him as follows.
494|Adi 17.48
495|TEXT 48
496|TEXT
497|grama-sambandhe ami tomara matula
498|bhagina, mui kustha-vyadhite hanachi vyakula
499|SYNONYMS
500|grama-sambandhe-in a village relationship; ami-I (am);
>|tomara-Your; matula-maternal uncle; bhagina-nephew; mui-I;
>|kustha-vyadhite-by the disease of leprosy; hanachi-have
>|become; vyakula-too much afflicted.
501|TRANSLATION
502|"My dear nephew, I am Your maternal uncle in our village
>|relationship. Please see how greatly this attack of leprosy
>|has afflicted me.
503|Adi 17.49
504|TEXT 49
505|TEXT
506|loka saba uddharite tomara avatara
507|muni bada dukhi, more karaha uddhara
508|SYNONYMS
509|loka-people; saba-all; uddharite-to deliver; tomara-Your;
>|avatara-incarnation; muni-I (am); bada-very; dukhi-unhappy;
>|more-unto me; karaha-please do; uddhara-deliverance.
510|TRANSLATION
511|"As an incarnation of God, You are delivering so many
>|fallen souls. I am also a greatly unhappy fallen soul.
>|Kindly deliver me by Your mercy."
512|PURPORT
513|It appears that although Gopala Capala was sinful,
>|talkative and insulting, he nevertheless had the
>|qualification of simplicity. Thus he believed Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu to be the incarnation of the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead who had come to deliver all fallen souls, and he
>|appealed for his own deliverance, seeking the mercy of the
>|Lord. He did not know, however, that the deliverance of the
>|fallen does not consist of curing their bodily diseases,
>|although it is also a fact that when a man is delivered
>|from the material clutches his material bodily diseases are
>|automatically cured. Gopala Capala simply wanted to be
>|delivered from the bodily sufferings of leprosy, but Sri
>|Caitanya, although accepting his sincere appeal, wanted to
>|inform him of the real cause of suffering.
514|Adi 17.50
515|TEXT 50
516|TEXT
517|eta suni' mahaprabhura ha-ila kruddha mana
518|krodhavese bale tare tarjana-vacana
519|SYNONYMS
520|eta-thus; suni'-hearing; mahaprabhura-of Lord Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; ha-ila-there was; kruddha-angry; mana-mind;
>|krodha-avese-out of intense anger; bale-says; tare-unto him;
>| tarjana-chastising; vacana-words.
521|TRANSLATION
522|Hearing this, Caitanya Mahaprabhu appeared greatly angry,
>|and in that angry mood He spoke some words chastising him.
523|Adi 17.51
524|TEXT 51
525|TEXT
526|are papi, bhakta-dvesi, tore na uddharimu
527|koti-janma ei mate kidaya khaoyaimu
528|SYNONYMS
529|are-O; papi-you sinful person; bhakta-dvesi-envious of
>|devotees; tore-you; na uddharimu-I shall not deliver; koti-
>|janma-for ten million births; ei mate-in this way; kidaya-
>|by the germs; khaoyaimu-I shall cause you to be bitten.
530|TRANSLATION
531|"O sinful person, envious of pure devotees, I shall not
>|deliver you! Rather, I shall have you bitten by these germs
>|for many millions of years.
532|PURPORT
533|We should note herein that all our sufferings in this
>|material world, especially from disease, are due to our
>|past sinful activities. And of all sinful activities,
>|actions directed against a pure devotee out of sheer envy
>|are considered extremely severe. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu
>|wanted Gopala Capala to understand the cause of his
>|suffering. Any person who disturbs a pure devotee engaged
>|in broadcasting the holy name of the Lord is certainly
>|punished like Gopala Capala. This is the instruction of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu. As we shall see, one who offends a
>|pure devotee can never satisfy Caitanya Mahaprabhu unless
>|and until he sincerely regrets his offense and thus
>|rectifies it.
534|Adi 17.52
535|TEXT 52
536|TEXT
537|srivase karaili tui bhavani-pujana
538|koti janma habe tora raurave patana
539|SYNONYMS
540|srivase-unto Srivasa Thakura; karaili-you have caused to do;
>| tui-you; bhavani-pujana-worshiping the goddess Bhavani;
>|koti janma-for ten million births; habe-there will be; tora-
>|your; raurave-in hell; patana-fall down.
541|TRANSLATION
542|"You have made Srivasa Thakura appear to have been
>|worshiping the goddess Bhavani. Simply for this offense,
>|you will have to fall down into hellish life for ten
>|million births.
543|PURPORT
544|There are many tantric followers who, wishing to eat meat
>|and drink wine, practice the black art of worshiping the
>|goddess Bhavani in a crematorium
>|. Such fools also consider this bhavani-puja to
>|be as good as worship of Lord Krsna in devotional service.
>|But such abominable tantric activities performed by so-
>|called svamis and yogis are herein condemned by
>|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu. He declares that such bhavani-
>|puja for drinking wine and eating meat quickly plunges one
>|into hellish life. The method of worship itself is already
>|hellish, and its results must also be hellish and nothing
>|more.
545|Many rascals say that whatever way one accepts, one will
>|ultimately reach Brahman. Yet we can see from this verse
>|how such persons reach Brahman. Brahman spreads everywhere,
>|but appreciation of Brahman in different objects leads to
>|different results. In the Bhagavad-gita (4.11) the Lord
>|says, ye yatha mam prapadyante tams tathaiva bhajamy aham: "
>|I reward everyone according to his surrender unto Me."
>|Mayavadis certainly realize Brahman in certain aspects, but
>|realization of Brahman in the aspects of wine, women and
>|meat is not the same realization of Brahman that devotees
>|achieve by chanting, dancing and eating prasadam. Mayavadi
>|philosophers, being educated in paltry knowledge, think all
>|sorts of Brahman realization one and the same and do not
>|consider varieties. But although Krsna is everywhere, by
>|His inconceivable potency He is simultaneously not
>|everywhere. Thus the Brahman realization of the tantric
>|cult is not the same Brahman realization as that of pure
>|devotees. Unless one reaches the highest point of Brahman
>|realization, Krsna consciousness, he is punishable. All
>|people except Krsna conscious devotees are to some
>|proportion pasandis, or demons, and thus they are
>|punishable by the Supreme Lord, the Personality of Godhead,
>|as stated below.
546|Adi 17.53
547|TEXT 53
548|TEXT
549|pasandi samharite mora ei avatara
550|pasandi samhari' bhakti karimu pracara
551|SYNONYMS
552|pasandi-demons, atheists; samharite-to kill; mora-My; ei-
>|this; avatara-incarnation; pasandi-atheist; samhari'-
>|killing; bhakti-devotional service; karimu-I shall do;
>|pracara-preaching.
553|TRANSLATION
554|"I have appeared in this incarnation to kill the demons [
>|pasandis] and, after killing them, to preach the cult of
>|devotional service."
555|PURPORT
556|Lord Caitanya's mission is the same as that of Lord Krsna,
>|which He states in the Bhagavad-gita (4.7 –8):
557|yada yada hi dharmasya glanir bhavati bharata
558|abhyutthanam adharmasya tadatmanam srjamy aham
559|paritranaya sadhunam vinasaya ca duskrtam
560|dharma-samsthapanarthaya sambhavami yuge yuge
561|"Whenever and wherever there is a decline
>|in religious practice, O descendant of Bharata, and a
>|predominant rise of irreligion-at that time I descend
>|Myself. In order to deliver the pious and to annihilate the
>|miscreants, as well as to reestablish the principles of
>|religion, I advent Myself millennium after millennium."
562|As explained here, the real purpose of an
>|incarnation of Godhead is to kill the atheists and maintain
>|the devotees. He does not say, like so many rascal
>|incarnations, that atheists and devotees are on the same
>|platform. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, or Lord Sri Krsna, the
>|real Personality of Godhead, does not advocate such an idea.
563|Atheists are punishable, whereas devotees are to be
>|protected. To maintain this principle is the mission of all
>|avataras, or incarnations. One must therefore identify an
>|incarnation by His activities, not by popular votes or
>|mental concoctions. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu gave protection
>|to devotees and killed many demons in the course of His
>|preaching work. He specifically mentioned that the Mayavadi
>|philosophers are the greatest demons. Therefore He warned
>|all others not to hear the Mayavada philosophy: mayavadi-
>|bhasya sunile haya sarva-nasa. Simply by
>|hearing the Mayavada interpretation of the sastras, one is
>|doomed (Cc. Madhya 6.169).
564|Adi 17.54
565|TEXT 54
566|TEXT
567|eta bali' gela prabhu karite ganga-snana
568|sei papi duhkha bhoge, na yaya parana
569|SYNONYMS
570|eta bali'-saying this; gela-went away; prabhu-the Lord;
>|karite-to take; ganga-snana-a bath in the Ganges; sei-that;
>|papi-sinful man; duhkha-pains; bhoge-suffers; na-not; yaya-
>|go away; parana-the life.
571|TRANSLATION
572|After saying this, the Lord left to take His bath in the
>|Ganges, and that sinful man did not give up his life but
>|continued to suffer.
573|PURPORT
574|It appears that an offender to a Vaisnava continues to
>|suffer and does not give up his life. We have actually seen
>|that a great vaisnava-aparadhi continuously suffered so
>|much that it was difficult for him to move, and yet he did
>|not die.
575|Adi 17.56
576|TEXTS 55–56
577|TEXT
578|sannyasa kariya yabe prabhu nilacale gela
579|tatha haite yabe kuliya grame aila
580|tabe sei papi prabhura la-ila sarana
581|hita upadesa kaila ha-iya karuna
582|SYNONYMS
583|sannyasa kariya-after accepting the renounced order of life;
>| yabe-when; prabhu-Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu; nilacale-to
>|Jagannatha Puri; gela-went; tatha haite-from there; yabe-
>|when; kuliya-of the name Kuliya; grame-to the village; aila-
>|came back; tabe-at that time; sei-that; papi-sinful man;
>|prabhura-of the Lord; la-ila-took; sarana-shelter; hita-
>|beneficial; upadesa-advice; kaila-gave; ha-iya-becoming;
>|karuna-merciful.
584|TRANSLATION
585|When Sri Caitanya, after accepting the renounced order of
>|life, went to Jagannatha Puri and then came back to the
>|village of Kuliya, upon His return that sinful man took
>|shelter at the Lord's lotus feet. The Lord, being merciful
>|to him, gave him instructions for his benefit.
586|PURPORT
587|Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura, in his Anubhasya,
>|has given the following note in connection with the village
>|Kuliya. The village originally known as Kuliya has
>|developed into what is now the city of Navadvipa. In
>|various authorized books like the Bhakti-ratnakara,
>|Caitanya-carita-mahakavya, Caitanya-candrodaya-nataka and
>|Caitanya-bhagavata it is mentioned that the village of
>|Kuliya is on the western side of the Ganges. Even now,
>|within the area known as Koladvipa, there is a place known
>|as kuliara ganja and a place called kuliara daha, both
>|within the jurisdiction of the present municipality of
>|Navadvipa. In the time of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu , the
>| two villages on the western side of the Ganges named
>|Kuliya and Pahadapura both belonged to the jurisdiction of
>|Bahiradvipa. At that time the place on the eastern side of
>|the Ganges now known as Antardvipa was
>|known as Navadvipa. At that time the place on the
>|eastern side of the Ganges now known as Antardvipa was
>|known as Navadvipa. At Sri Mayapur that place is still
>|known as Dvipera Matha. There is another place of the name
>|Kuliya near Kancadapada, but it is not the same Kuliya
>|mentioned here. It cannot be accepted as aparadha-
>|bhanjanera pada, or the place where the offense was excused,
>| for that occurred in the above-mentioned Kuliya on the
>|western side of the Ganges. For business reasons many
>|envious persons oppose excavation of the real place, and
>|sometimes they advertise unauthorized places as the
>|authorized one.
588|Adi 17.57–58
589|TEXTS 57–58
590|TEXT
591|srivasa panditera sthane ache aparadha
592|tatha yaha, tenho yadi karena prasada
593|tabe tora habe ei papa-vimocana
594|yadi punah aiche nahi kara acarana
595|SYNONYMS
596|srivasa panditera-of Srivasa Thakura; sthane-at the lotus
>|feet; ache-there is; aparadha-offense; tatha-there; yaha-go;
>| tenho-he; yadi-if; karena-does; prasada-blessings; tabe-
>|then; tora-your; habe-there will be; ei-this; papa-vimocana-
>|immunity from sinful reaction; yadi-if; punah-again; aiche-
>|such; nahi kara-you do not commit; acarana-behavior.
597|TRANSLATION
598|"You have committed an offense at the lotus feet of Srivasa
>|Thakura," the Lord said. "First you must go there and beg
>|for his mercy, and then if he gives you his blessings and
>|you do not commit such sins again, you will be freed from
>|these reactions."
599|Adi 17.59
600|TEXT 59
601|TEXT
602|tabe vipra la-ila asi srivasa sarana
603|tanhara krpaya haila papa-vimocana
604|SYNONYMS
605|tabe-after that; vipra-the brahmana (Gopala Capala); la-ila-
>|took shelter; asi-coming; srivasa-Srivasa Thakura; sarana-
>|shelter of his lotus feet; tanhara krpaya-by his mercy;
>|haila-became; papa-vimocana-free from all sinful reaction.
606|TRANSLATION
607|Then the brahmana, Gopala Capala, went to Srivasa Thakura
>|and took shelter of his lotus feet, and by Srivasa Thakura'
>|s mercy he was freed from all sinful reactions.
608|Adi 17.60
609|TEXT 60
610|TEXT
611|ara eka vipra aila kirtana dekhite
612|dvare kapata,-na paila bhitare yaite
613|SYNONYMS
614|ara-another; eka-one; vipra-brahmana; aila-came; kirtana-
>|chanting of the Hare Krsna mantra; dekhite-to see; dvare-in
>|the gateway; kapata-the door (being closed); na paila-did
>|not get; bhitare-inside; yaite-to go.
615|TRANSLATION
616|Another brahmana came to see the kirtana performance,
>|but the door was closed, and he could not enter the hall.
617|Adi 17.61
618|TEXT 61
619|TEXT
620|phiri' gela vipra ghare mane duhkha pana
621|ara dina prabhuke kahe gangaya laga pana
622|SYNONYMS
623|phiri' gela-went back; vipra-the brahmana; ghare-to his
>|home; mane-within his mind; duhkha-unhappiness; pana-
>|getting; ara dina-the next day; prabhuke-unto the Lord;
>|kahe-says; gangaya-on the bank of the Ganges; laga-touch;
>|pana-getting.
624|TRANSLATION
625|He returned home with an unhappy mind, but on the next day
>|he met Lord Caitanya on the bank of the Ganges and spoke to
>|Him.
626|Adi 17.62
627|TEXT 62
628|TEXT
629|sapiba tomare muni, panachi mano-duhkha
630|paita chindiya sape pracanda durmukha
631|SYNONYMS
632|sapiba-I shall curse; tomare-You; muni-I; panachi-I have;
>|manah-duhkha-mentally very much aggrieved; paita-sacred
>|thread; chindiya-breaking; sape-cursing; pracanda-fiercely;
>|durmukha-one who speaks harshly.
633|TRANSLATION
634|That brahmana was expert in talking harshly and cursing
>|others. Thus he broke his sacred thread and declared, "I
>|shall now curse You, for Your behavior has greatly
>|aggrieved me."
635|Adi 17.63
636|TEXT 63
637|TEXT
638|samsara-sukha tomara ha-uka vinasa
639|sapa suni' prabhura citte ha-ila ullasa
640|SYNONYMS
641|samsara-sukha-material happiness; tomara-Your; ha-uka-may
>|it become; vinasa-all vanquished; sapa suni'-hearing this
>|curse; prabhura-of the Lord; citte-within His mind; ha-ila-
>|there was; ullasa-jubilation.
642|TRANSLATION
643|The brahmana cursed the Lord, "You shall be bereft of all
>|material happiness!" When the Lord heard this, He felt
>|great jubilation within Himself.
644|Adi 17.64
645|TEXT 64
646|TEXT
647|prabhura sapa-varta yei sune sraddhavan
648|brahma-sapa haite tara haya paritrana
649|SYNONYMS
650|prabhura-of the Lord; sapa-varta-the incident of the curse;
>|yei-anyone who; sune-hears; sraddhavan-with affection;
>|brahma-sapa-cursing by a brahmana; haite-from; tara-his;
>|haya-becomes; paritrana-deliverance.
651|TRANSLATION
652|Any faithful person who hears of this brahmana's cursing
>|Lord Caitanya is delivered from all brahminical curses.
653|PURPORT
654|One should know with firm conviction that the Lord, being
>|transcendental, is never subject to any curse or
>|benediction. Only ordinary living entities are subjected to
>|curses and the punishments of Yamaraja. As the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu is beyond
>|such punishments and benedictions. When one understands
>|this fact with faith and love, he personally becomes free
>|from all curses uttered by brahmanas or anyone else. This
>|incident is not mentioned in the Caitanya-bhagavata.
655|Adi 17.65
656|TEXT 65
657|TEXT
658|mukunda-dattere kaila danda-parasada
659|khandila tahara cittera saba avasada
660|SYNONYMS
661|mukunda-dattere-unto Mukunda Datta; kaila-did; danda-
>|punishment; parasada-benediction; khandila-vanquished;
>|tahara-his; cittera-of the mind; saba-all kinds of; avasada-
>|depressions.
662|TRANSLATION
663|Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu blessed Mukunda Datta with
>|punishment and in that way vanquished all his mental
>|depression.
664|PURPORT
665|Mukunda Datta was once forbidden to enter the association
>|of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu because of his mixing with the
>|Mayavadi impersonalists. When Lord Caitanya manifested His
>|maha-prakasa, He called all the devotees one after another
>|and blessed them, while Mukunda Datta stood outside the
>|door. The devotees informed the Lord that Mukunda Datta was
>|waiting outside, but the Lord replied, "I shall not soon be
>|pleased with Mukunda Datta, for though he explains
>|devotional service among devotees, he then goes to
>|Mayavadis to hear from them the Yoga-vasistha-ramayana,
>|which is full of Mayavada philosophy. For this I am greatly
>|displeased with him." Hearing the Lord speak in that way,
>|Mukunda Datta, standing outside, was exceedingly glad that
>|the Lord would at some time be pleased with him, although
>|He was not pleased at that moment. But when the Lord
>|understood that Mukunda Datta was going to give up the
>|association of the Mayavadis for good, He was pleased, and
>|He at once called to see Mukunda. Thus He delivered him
>|from the association of the Mayavadis and gave him the
>|association of pure devotees.
666|Adi 17.66
667|TEXT 66
668|TEXT
669|acarya-gosanire prabhu kare guru-bhakti
670|tahate acarya bada haya duhkha-mati
671|SYNONYMS
672|acarya-gosanire-unto Advaita Acarya; prabhu-the Lord; kare-
>|does; guru-bhakti-offering respects like a spiritual master;
>| tahate-in that way; acarya-Advaita Acarya; bada-very much;
>|haya-becomes; duhkha-mati-aggrieved.
673|TRANSLATION
674|Lord Caitanya respected Advaita Acarya as His spiritual
>|master, but Advaita Acarya Prabhu was greatly aggrieved by
>|such behavior.
675|Adi 17.67
676|TEXT 67
677|TEXT
678|bhangi kari' jnana-marga karila vyakhyana
679|krodhavese prabhu tare kaila avajnana
680|SYNONYMS
681|bhangi kari'-doing it in fun; jnana-marga-the path of
>|philosophical speculation; karila-did; vyakhyana-
>|explanation; krodha-avese-in the mood of anger; prabhu-the
>|Lord; tare-to Him; kaila-did; avajnana-disrespect.
682|TRANSLATION
683|Thus He whimsically began to explain the path of
>|philosophical speculation, and the Lord, in His anger,
>|seemingly disrespected Him.
684|Adi 17.68
685|TEXT 68
686|TEXT
687|tabe acarya-gosanira ananda ha-ila
688|lajjita ha-iya prabhu prasada karila
689|SYNONYMS
690|tabe-at that time; acarya-gosanira-of Advaita Acarya;
>|ananda-pleasure; ha-ila-aroused; lajjita-ashamed; ha-iya-
>|becoming; prabhu-the Lord; prasada-benediction; karila-
>|offered.
691|TRANSLATION
692|At that time Advaita Acarya was greatly pleased. The Lord
>|understood this, and He was somewhat ashamed, but He
>|offered Advaita Acarya His benediction.
693|PURPORT
694|Advaita Acarya was a disciple of Madhavendra Puri, Isvara
>|Puri's spiritual master. Therefore Isvara Puri, the
>|spiritual master of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, was Advaita
>|Acarya's Godbrother. In view of this, Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu treated Advaita Acarya as His spiritual master,
>|but Sri Advaita Acarya did not like this behavior of Lord
>|Caitanya, for He wanted to be treated as His eternal
>|servant. Advaita Prabhu's aspiration was to be a servant of
>|the Lord, not His spiritual master. He therefore devised a
>|plan to antagonize the Lord. He began to explain the path
>|of philosophical speculation in the midst of some
>|unfortunate Mayavadis, and when Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu
>|heard about this, He immediately went there and in a very
>|angry mood began to beat Advaita Acarya. At that time,
>|Advaita Acarya, greatly pleased, began to dance, saying, "
>|Just see how My desire has now been fulfilled! Lord
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu used to treat Me honorably for so long,
>|but now He is treating Me neglectfully. This is My reward.
>|His affection for Me is so great that He wanted to save Me
>|from the hands of the Mayavadis." Hearing this statement,
>|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu was somewhat ashamed, but He was
>|very pleased with Advaita Acarya.
695|Adi 17.69
696|TEXT 69
697|TEXT
698|murari-gupta-mukhe suni' rama-guna-grama
699|lalate likhila tanra 'ramadasa' nama
700|SYNONYMS
701|murari-gupta-of Murari Gupta; mukhe-from the mouth; suni'-
>|hearing; rama-of Lord Ramacandra; guna-grama-glories;
>|lalate-on the forehead; likhila-wrote; tanra-of Murari
>|Gupta; rama-dasa-the eternal servant of Lord Ramacandra;
>|nama-the name.
702|TRANSLATION
703|Murari Gupta was a great devotee of Lord Ramacandra. When
>|Lord Caitanya heard Lord Ramacandra's glories from his
>|mouth, He immediately wrote on his forehead "ramadasa" [the
>|eternal servant of Lord Ramacandra].
704|Adi 17.70
705|TEXT 70
706|TEXT
707|sridharera lauha-patre kaila jala-pana
708|samasta bhaktere dila ista vara-dana
709|SYNONYMS
710|sridharera-of Sridhara; lauha-patre-from the iron pot;
>|kaila-did; jala-pana-drinking of water; samasta-all;
>|bhaktere-to the devotees; dila-gave; ista-desired; vara-
>|dana-benediction.
711|TRANSLATION
712|Once Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu went to the house of Sridhara
>|after kirtana and drank water from his damaged iron pot.
>|Then He bestowed His benediction upon all the devotees
>|according to their desires.
713|PURPORT
714|After the mass nagara-sankirtana in protest against the
>|magistrate Chand Kazi, the Kazi was converted to a devotee.
>|Then Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu returned with His sankirtana
>|party to the house of Sridhara, and Chand Kazi followed Him.
>| All the devotees rested there for some time and drank
>|water from Sridhara's damaged iron pot. The Lord accepted
>|the water because the pot belonged to a devotee. Chand Kazi
>|then returned home. The place where they rested is still
>|situated on the northeastern side of Mayapur, and it is
>|known as kirtana-visrama-sthana, "the resting place of the
>|kirtana party."
715|Adi 17.71
716|TEXT 71
717|TEXT
718|haridasa thakurere karila prasada
719|acarya-sthane matara khandaila aparadha
720|SYNONYMS
721|haridasa thakurere-unto Haridasa Thakura; karila-did;
>|prasada-benediction; acarya-sthane-in the home of Advaita
>|Acarya; matara-of Sacimata; khandaila-vanquished; aparadha-
>|the offense.
722|TRANSLATION
723|After this incident the Lord blessed Haridasa Thakura and
>|vanquished the offense of His mother at the home of Advaita
>|Acarya.
724|PURPORT
725|On the maha-prakasa day, Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu embraced
>|Haridasa Thakura and informed him that he was none other
>|than an incarnation of Prahlada Maharaja. When Visvarupa
>|took sannyasa, Sacimata thought that Advaita Acarya had
>|persuaded Him to do so. Therefore she accused Advaita
>|Acarya of this, which was an offense at His
>|lotus feet. Later Lord Caitanya induced His mother to take
>|the dust of Advaita Acarya's lotus feet, and thus her
>|vaisnava-aparadha was nullified.
726|Adi 17.72
727|TEXT 72
728|TEXT
729|bhakta-gane prabhu nama-mahima kahila
730|suniya paduya tahan artha-vada kaila
731|SYNONYMS
732|bhakta-gane-unto the devotees; prabhu-the Lord; nama-mahima-
>|glories of the holy name; kahila-explained; suniya-hearing;
>|paduya-the students; tahan-there; artha-vada-interpretation;
>| kaila-did.
733|TRANSLATION
734|Once when the Lord explained the glories of the holy name
>|to the devotees, some ordinary students who heard Him
>|fashioned their own interpretation.
735|Adi 17.73
736|TEXT 73
737|TEXT
738|name stuti-vada suni' prabhura haila duhkha
739|sabare nisedhila,-ihara na dekhiha mukha
740|SYNONYMS
741|name-in the holy name of the Lord; stuti-vada-exaggeration;
>|suni'-hearing; prabhura-of the Lord; haila-became; duhkha-
>|aggrieved; sabare-unto everyone; nisedhila-warned; ihara-of
>|him; na-do not; dekhiha-see; mukha-face.
742|TRANSLATION
743|When a student interpreted the glories of the holy name as
>|a prayer of exaggeration, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, greatly
>|unhappy, immediately warned everyone not to see the student'
>|s face henceforward.
744|PURPORT
745|Once when Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu explained the glories of
>|the transcendental potency of the Lord's holy name, the
>|Hare Krsna maha-mantra, one unfortunate student said that
>|such glorification of the holy name was an exaggeration in
>|the sastras to induce people to take to it. In this way the
>|student interpreted the glories of the holy name. This is
>|called artha-vada, and it is one of the ten offenses at the
>|lotus feet of the holy name of the Lord. There are many
>|kinds of offenses, but the offense known as nama-aparadha,
>|an offense at the lotus feet of the holy name, is extremely
>|dangerous. The Lord therefore warned everyone not to see
>|the face of the offender. The Lord immediately took a bath
>|in the Ganges with all His clothes on to teach everyone to
>|avoid such a nama-aparadha. The holy name is identical with
>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead. There is no difference
>|between the person God and His holy name. This is the
>|absolute position of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
>|Therefore one who distinguishes between the Lord and His
>|name is called a pasandi, or nonbeliever, an atheistic
>|demon. Glorification of the holy name is glorification of
>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead. One should never
>|attempt to distinguish between the Lord and His name or
>|interpret the glories of the holy name as mere
>|exaggerations.
746|Adi 17.74
747|TEXT 74
748|TEXT
749|sagane sacele giya kaila ganga-snana
750|bhaktira mahima tahan karila vyakhyana
751|SYNONYMS
752|sa-gane-with His followers; sa-cele-without leaving the
>|clothes; giya-going; kaila-did; ganga-snana-bathing in the
>|Ganges; bhaktira-of devotional service; mahima-glories;
>|tahan-there; karila-did; vyakhyana-explanation.
753|TRANSLATION
754|Without even removing His garments, Lord Caitanya took a
>|bath in the Ganges with His companions. There He explained
>|the glories of devotional service.
755|Adi 17.75
756|TEXT 75
757|TEXT
758|jnana-karma-yoga-dharme nahe krsna vasa
759|krsna-vasa-hetu eka-prema-bhakti-rasa
760|SYNONYMS
761|jnana-the path of speculative knowledge; karma-fruitive
>|activities; yoga-the process of controlling the senses;
>|dharme-in the activities, in such an occupation; nahe-is
>|not; krsna-Lord Krsna; vasa-pleased; krsna-of Lord Krsna;
>|vasa-for the pleasure; hetu-reason; eka-one; prema-love;
>|bhakti-devotional service; rasa-such a mellow.
762|TRANSLATION
763|"By following the paths of speculative philosophical
>|knowledge, fruitive activity or mystic yoga to control the
>|senses, one cannot satisfy Krsna, the Supreme Lord.
>|Unalloyed devotional love for Krsna is the only cause for
>|the Lord's satisfaction.
764|Adi 17.76
765|TEXT 76
766|TEXT
767|na sadhayati mam yogo
768|na sankhyam dharma uddhava
769|na svadhyayas tapas tyago
770|yatha bhaktir mamorjita
771|SYNONYMS
772|na-never; sadhayati-causes to remain satisfied; mam-Me;
>|yogah-the process of control; na-nor; sankhyam-the process
>|of gaining philosophical knowledge about the Absolute Truth;
>| dharmah-such an occupation; uddhava-My dear Uddhava; na-
>|nor; svadhyayah-study of the Vedas; tapah-austerities;
>|tyagah-renunciation, acceptance of sannyasa, or charity;
>|yatha-as much as; bhaktih-devotional service; mama-unto Me;
>|urjita-developed.
773|TRANSLATION
774|"[The Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna, said:] 'My
>|dear Uddhava, neither through astanga-yoga [the mystic yoga
>|system to control the senses], nor through impersonal
>|monism or an analytical study of the Absolute Truth, nor
>|through study of the Vedas, nor through
>|austerities, charity or acceptance
>|of sannyasa can one satisfy Me as much as by
>|developing unalloyed devotional service unto Me.' "
775|PURPORT
776|Karmis, jnanis, yogis, tapasvis and students of Vedic
>|literature who do not have Krsna consciousness simply beat
>|around the bush and do not get any final profit because
>|they have no clear knowledge of the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead. Nor do they have faith in approaching Him by
>|discharging devotional service, although everywhere such
>|service is repeatedly emphasized, as it is in this verse
>|from Srimad-Bhagavatam (11.14.20). The Bhagavad-gita (
>|18.55) also declares, bhaktya mam abhijanati yavan yas
>|casmi tattvatah: "One can understand the Supreme
>|Personality as He is only by devotional service." If one
>|wants to understand the Supreme Personality factually, he
>|must take to the path of devotional service and not waste
>|time in profitless philosophical speculation, fruitive
>|activity, mystic yogic practice or severe austerity and
>|penance. Elsewhere in the Bhagavad-gita (12.5) the Lord
>|confirms, kleso 'dhikataras tesam avyaktasakta-cetasam: "
>|For those whose minds are attached to the unmanifested,
>|impersonal feature of the Supreme, advancement is very
>|troublesome." People who are attached to the impersonal
>|feature of the Lord are obliged to take great trouble, yet
>|nevertheless they cannot understand the Absolute Truth. As
>|explained in Srimad-Bhagavatam (1.2.11), brahmeti
>|paramatmeti bhagavan iti sabdyate. Unless one understands
>|the Supreme Personality of Godhead, the original source of
>|both Brahman and Paramatma, one is still in darkness about
>|the Absolute Truth.
777|Adi 17.77
778|TEXT 77
779|TEXT
780|murarike kahe tumi krsna vasa kaila
781|suniya murari sloka kahite lagila
782|SYNONYMS
783|murarike-unto Murari; kahe-says; tumi-you; krsna-Lord Krsna;
>| vasa-satisfied; kaila-made; suniya-hearing; murari-
>|Murari; sloka-verse; kahite-to speak; lagila-began.
784|TRANSLATION
785|Lord Caitanya then praised Murari Gupta, saying, "You have
>|satisfied Lord Krsna." Hearing this, Murari Gupta quoted a
>|verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam.
786|Adi 17.78
787|TEXT 78
788|TEXT
789|kvaham daridrah papiyan
790|kva krsnah sri-niketanah
791|brahma-bandhur iti smaham
792|bahubhyam parirambhitah
793|SYNONYMS
794|kva-whereas; aham-I (am); daridrah-very poor; papiyan-
>|sinful; kva-whereas; krsnah-the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead; sri-niketanah-the shelter of the goddess of
>|fortune; brahma-bandhuh-a caste brahmana without
>|brahminical qualifications; iti-thus; sma-certainly; aham-I
>|(am); bahubhyam-by the arms; parirambhitah-embraced.
795|TRANSLATION
796|"'Since I am but a poor, sinful brahma-bandhu, not
>|brahminically qualified although born in a brahmana family,
>|and You, Lord Krsna, are the shelter of the goddess of
>|fortune, it is simply wonderful, my dear Lord Krsna, that
>|You have embraced me with Your arms.' "
797|PURPORT
798|This is a verse from Srimad-Bhagavatam (10.81.16) spoken by
>|Sudama Vipra in the presence of Lord Sri Krsna. This and
>|the previous verse quoted from Srimad-Bhagavatam clearly
>|indicate that although Krsna is so great that it is not
>|possible for anyone to satisfy Him, He exhibits His
>|greatness by being personally satisfied even with one who
>|is unqualified from so many angles of vision. Sudama Vipra
>|was born in a family of brahmanas, and he was a learned
>|scholar and a class friend of Krsna's, yet he considered
>|himself unfit to be strictly called a brahmana. He called
>|himself a brahma-bandhu, meaning "one born in a brahmana
>|family but not brahminically qualified." Because of His
>|great respect for brahmanas, however, Krsna embraced Sudama
>|Vipra, although he was not a regular brahmana but a brahma-
>|bandhu, or friend of a brahmana family. Murari Gupta could
>|not be called even a brahma-bandhu because he was born of a
>|vaidya family and according to the social structure was
>|therefore considered a sudra. But Krsna bestowed special
>|mercy upon Murari Gupta because he was a beloved devotee of
>|the Lord, as stated by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. The purport
>|of Sri Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura's elaborate
>|discussion of this subject is that no qualification in this
>|material world can satisfy the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead, Krsna, yet everything becomes successful simply
>|through development of devotional service to the Lord.
799|The members of the International Society for Krishna
>|Consciousness cannot even call themselves brahma-bandhus.
>|Therefore our only means for satisfying Krsna is to pursue
>|the injunctions of Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who says:
800|yare dekha, tare kaha 'krsna'-upadesa
801|amara ajnaya guru hana tara' ei desa
802|"Whomever you meet, instruct him on the teachings of Krsna.
>|In this way, on My order, become a spiritual master and
>|deliver the people of this country." (Cc. Madhya 7.128)
>|Simply trying to follow the orders of Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, we speak to the people of the world about
>|Bhagavad-gita As It Is. This will make us qualified to
>|satisfy the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Krsna.
803|Adi 17.79
804|TEXT 79
805|TEXT
806|eka-dina prabhu saba bhakta-gana lana
807|sankirtana kari' vaise srama-yukta hana
808|SYNONYMS
809|eka-dina-one day; prabhu-the Lord; saba-all; bhakta-gana-
>|devotees; lana-taking into company; sankirtana-chanting the
>|Hare Krsna mantra; kari'-doing so; vaise-sat; srama-yukta-
>|feeling fatigued; hana-thus being.
810|TRANSLATION
811|One day the Lord performed sankirtana with all His devotees,
>| and when they were greatly fatigued they sat down.
812|Adi 17.80
813|TEXT 80
814|TEXT
815|eka amra-bija prabhu angane ropila
816|tat-ksane janmila vrksa badite lagila
817|SYNONYMS
818|eka-one; amra-bija-seed of a mango; prabhu-the Lord; angane-
>|in the yard; ropila-sowed; tat-ksane-immediately; janmila-
>|fructified; vrksa-a tree; badite-to grow; lagila-began.
819|TRANSLATION
820|The Lord then sowed a mango seed in the yard, and
>|immediately the seed fructified into a tree and began to
>|grow.
821|Adi 17.81
822|TEXT 81
823|TEXT
824|dekhite dekhite vrksa ha-ila phalita
825|pakila aneka phala, sabei vismita
826|SYNONYMS
827|dekhite dekhite-as people were seeing; vrksa-the tree; ha-
>|ila-became; phalita-fully grown with fruits; pakila-ripened;
>| aneka-many; phala-fruits; sabei-every one of them; vismita-
>|struck with wonder.
828|TRANSLATION
829|As people looked on, the tree became fully grown, with
>|fruits that fully ripened. Thus everyone was struck with
>|wonder.
830|Adi 17.82
831|TEXT 82
832|TEXT
833|sata dui phala prabhu sighra padaila
834|praksalana kari' krsne bhoga lagaila
835|SYNONYMS
836|sata-hundred; dui-two; phala-fruits; prabhu-the Lord;
>|sighra-very soon; padaila-caused to be picked up;
>|praksalana-washing; kari'-doing; krsne-to Lord Krsna; bhoga-
>|offering; lagaila-made it so.
837|TRANSLATION
838|The Lord immediately picked about two hundred fruits, and
>|after washing them He offered them to Krsna to eat.
839|Adi 17.83
840|TEXT 83
841|TEXT
842|rakta-pita-varna,-nahi asthi-valkala
843|eka janera peta bhare khaile eka phala
844|SYNONYMS
845|rakta-pita-varna-the mangoes were red and yellow in color;
>|nahi-there was none; asthi-seed; valkala-or skin; eka-one;
>|janera-man's; peta-belly; bhare-filled up; khaile-if he
>|would eat; eka-one; phala-fruit.
846|TRANSLATION
847|The fruits were all red and yellow, with no seed inside and
>|no skin outside, and eating one fruit would immediately
>|fill a man's belly.
848|PURPORT
849|In India a mango is considered best when it is red and
>|yellow, its seed is very small, its skin is very thin, and
>|it is so palatable that if a person eats one fruit he will
>|be satisfied. The mango is considered the king of all
>|fruits.
850|Adi 17.84
851|TEXT 84
852|TEXT
853|dekhiya santusta haila sacira nandana
854|sabake khaoyala age kariya bhaksana
855|SYNONYMS
856|dekhiya-seeing this; santusta-satisfied; haila-became;
>|sacira-of mother Saci; nandana-son; sabake-everyone;
>|khaoyala-made to eat; age-in the beginning; kariya-doing;
>|bhaksana-eating Himself.
857|TRANSLATION
858|Seeing the quality of the mangoes, the Lord was greatly
>|satisfied, and thus after eating first, He fed all the
>|other devotees.
859|Adi 17.85
860|TEXT 85
861|TEXT
862|asthi-valkala nahi,-amrta-rasamaya
863|eka phala khaile rase udara puraya
864|SYNONYMS
865|asthi-seed; valkala-skin; nahi-there is none; amrta-nectar;
>|rasa-maya-full of juice; eka-one; phala-fruit; khaile-if
>|one eats; rase-with the juice; udara-belly; puraya-
>|fulfilled.
866|TRANSLATION
867|The fruits had no seeds or skins. They were full of
>|nectarean juice and were so sweet that a man would be fully
>|satisfied by eating only one.
868|Adi 17.86
869|TEXT 86
870|TEXT
871|ei-mata pratidina phale bara masa
872|vaisnava khayena phala,-prabhura ullasa
873|SYNONYMS
874|ei-mata-in this way; prati-dina-every day; phale-fruit grew;
>| bara-twelve; masa-months; vaisnava-the Vaisnavas; khayena-
>|eat; phala-the fruits; prabhura-the Lord's; ullasa-
>|satisfaction.
875|TRANSLATION
876|In this way, fruits grew on the tree every day throughout
>|the twelve months of the year, and the Vaisnavas used to
>|eat them, to the Lord's great satisfaction.
877|Adi 17.87
878|TEXT 87
879|TEXT
880|ei saba lila kare sacira nandana
881|anya loka nahi jane vina bhakta-gana
882|SYNONYMS
883|ei saba-all these; lila-pastimes; kare-performed; sacira-of
>|mother Saci; nandana-son; anya loka-other people; nahi-do
>|not; jane-know; vina-except; bhakta-gana-the devotees.
884|TRANSLATION
885|These are confidential pastimes of the son of Saci. Other
>|than devotees, no one knows of this incident.
886|PURPORT
887|Nondevotees cannot believe this incident, yet the place
>|where the tree grew still exists in Mayapur. It is called
>|Amra-ghatta or Ama-ghata.
888|Adi 17.88
889|TEXT 88
890|TEXT
891|ei mata bara-masa kirtana-avasane
892|amra-mahotsava prabhu kare dine dine
893|SYNONYMS
894|ei mata-in this way; bara-masa-for twelve months; kirtana-
>|chanting of the Hare Krsna mantra; avasane-at the end; amra-
>|maha-utsava-festival of eating mangoes; prabhu-the Lord;
>|kare-performs; dine dine-every day.
895|TRANSLATION
896|In this way the Lord performed sankirtana every day, and at
>|the end of sankirtana there was a mango-eating festival
>|every day for twelve months.
897|PURPORT
898|On principle, Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu would distribute
>|prasadam at the end of kirtana performances. Similarly, the
>|members of the Krsna consciousness movement must distribute
>|some prasadam to the audience after performing kirtana.
899|Adi 17.89
900|TEXT 89
901|TEXT
902|kirtana karite prabhu aila megha-gana
903|apana-icchaya kaila megha nivarana
904|SYNONYMS
905|kirtana-sankirtana; karite-performing; prabhu-the Lord;
>|aila-there was; megha-gana-bunches of clouds; apana-icchaya-
>|by self-will; kaila-made; megha-of the clouds; nivarana-
>|stopping.
906|TRANSLATION
907|Once while Caitanya Mahaprabhu was performing kirtana,
>|clouds assembled in the sky, and the Lord, by His own will,
>|immediately stopped them from pouring rain.
908|PURPORT
909|In this connection Srila Bhaktivinoda Thakura says that
>|once when Lord Caitanya was performing sankirtana a short
>|way from the village, some clouds appeared overhead. By the
>|supreme will of the Lord, the clouds were asked to disperse,
>| and they did. Because of this incident, that place is
>|still known as Meghera-cara. Since the course of the Ganges
>|has now changed, the village of the name Belapukhuriya,
>|which was formerly situated in a different place, called
>|Taranavasa, has now become known as Meghera-cara. The
>|Madhya-khanda of Srila Locana dasa Thakura's Caitanya-
>|mangala also relates that once at the end of the day, when
>|evening clouds assembled overhead and thundered
>|threateningly, all the Vaisnavas were very much afraid. But
>|the Lord took His karatalas in His hands and personally
>|began chanting the Hare Krsna mantra, looking up toward
>|the sky as if to direct the demigods in the higher planets.
>|Thus all the assembled clouds dispersed, and as the sky
>|became clear, with the moon rising, the Lord began dancing
>|very happily with His jubilant and satisfied devotees.
910|Adi 17.90
911|TEXT 90
912|TEXT
913|eka-dina prabhu srivasere ajna dila
914|'brhat sahasra-nama' pada, sunite mana haila
915|SYNONYMS
916|eka-dina-one day; prabhu-the Lord; srivasere-unto Srivasa
>|Thakura; ajna-order; dila-gave; brhat-great; sahasra-nama-
>|one thousand names; pada-read; sunite-to hear; mana-mind;
>|haila-wanted.
917|TRANSLATION
918|One day the Lord ordered Srivasa Thakura to read the Brhat-
>|sahasra-nama [the thousand names of Lord Visnu], for He
>|wanted to hear them at that time.
919|Adi 17.91
920|TEXT 91
921|TEXT
922|padite aila stave nrsimhera nama
923|suniya avista haila prabhu gauradhama
924|SYNONYMS
925|padite-while reading; aila-came; stave-in the prayer;
>|nrsimhera-of Lord Nrsimha; nama-the holy name; suniya-
>|hearing; avista-absorbed; haila-became; prabhu-Lord; gaura-
>|dhama-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
926|TRANSLATION
927|As he read the thousand names of the Lord, in due course
>|the holy name of Lord Nrsimha appeared. When Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu heard the holy name of Lord Nrsimha, He became
>|fully absorbed in thought.
928|PURPORT
929|The Caitanya-mangala, Madhya-khanda, describes this
>|incident as follows: Srivasa Pandita was performing the
>|sraddha ceremony for his father, and as is customary, he
>|was hearing the thousand names of Lord Visnu. At that time
>|Gaurahari (Lord Caitanya) appeared on the scene, and He
>|also began to hear the thousand names of Visnu with full
>|satisfaction. When He thus heard the holy name of Lord
>|Nrsimha, Lord Caitanya became absorbed in thought, and He
>|became angry like Nrsimha Prabhu in His angry mood. His
>|eyes became red, His bodily hairs stood on end, all the
>|parts of His body trembled, and He made a thundering sound.
>|All of a sudden He took up a club, and people became
>|greatly afraid, thinking, "We do not know what kind of
>|offense we have now committed!" But then Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu adjusted His thoughts and sat down on His seat.
930|Adi 17.92
931|TEXT 92
932|TEXT
933|nrsimha-avese prabhu hate gada lana
934|pasandi marite yaya nagare dhaiya
935|SYNONYMS
936|nrsimha-avese-in the ecstatic mood of Lord Nrsimha; prabhu-
>|the Lord; hate-in His hand; gada-club; lana-taking; pasandi-
>|the atheists; marite-to kill; yaya-goes; nagare-in the city;
>| dhaiya-running.
937|TRANSLATION
938|In the mood of Lord Nrsimhadeva, Lord Caitanya ran through
>|the city streets, club in hand, ready to kill all the
>|atheists.
939|Adi 17.93
940|TEXT 93
941|TEXT
942|nrsimha-avesa dekhi' maha-tejomaya
943|patha chadi' bhage loka pana bada bhaya
944|SYNONYMS
945|nrsimha-avesa-the ecstasy of Lord Nrsimhadeva; dekhi'-
>|seeing; maha-tejo-maya-very fierce; patha chadi'-giving up
>|the road; bhage-run away; loka-all people; pana-getting;
>|bada-very much; bhaya-afraid.
946|TRANSLATION
947|Seeing Him appearing very fierce in the ecstasy of Lord
>|Nrsimha, people ran from the street and fled here and there,
>| afraid of His anger.
948|Adi 17.94
949|TEXT 94
950|TEXT
951|loka-bhaya dekhi' prabhura bahya ha-ila
952|srivasa-grhete giya gada phelaila
953|SYNONYMS
954|loka-bhaya-the fearful people; dekhi'-seeing this; prabhura-
>|of the Lord; bahya-external sense; ha-ila-appeared; srivasa-
>|grhete-in the house of Srivasa Pandita; giya-going there;
>|gada-the club; phelaila-threw away.
955|TRANSLATION
956|Seeing the people so afraid, the Lord came to His external
>|senses and thus returned to the house of Srivasa Thakura
>|and threw away the club.
957|Adi 17.95
958|TEXT 95
959|TEXT
960|srivase kahena prabhu kariya visada
961|loka bhaya paya,-mora haya aparadha
962|SYNONYMS
963|srivase-unto Srivasa Thakura; kahena-says; prabhu-the Lord;
>|kariya-becoming; visada-morose; loka-people; bhaya paya-
>|become afraid; mora-My; haya-there is; aparadha-offense.
964|TRANSLATION
965|The Lord became morose and said to Srivasa Thakura, "When I
>|adopted the mood of Lord Nrsimhadeva, people were greatly
>|afraid. Therefore I stopped, since causing fear among
>|people is an offense."
966|Adi 17.96
967|TEXT 96
968|TEXT
969|srivasa balena,-ye tomara nama laya
970|tara koti aparadha saba haya ksaya
971|SYNONYMS
972|srivasa balena-Srivasa Pandita said; ye-anyone who; tomara-
>|Your; nama-holy name; laya-takes; tara-his; koti-ten
>|million; aparadha-offenses; saba-all; haya-become; ksaya-
>|vanquished.
973|TRANSLATION
974|Srivasa Thakura replied, "Anyone who takes Your holy name
>|vanquishes ten million of his offenses immediately.
975|Adi 17.97
976|TEXT 97
977|TEXT
978|aparadha nahi, kaile lokera nistara
979|ye toma' dekhila, tara chutila samsara
980|SYNONYMS
981|aparadha-offense; nahi-did not; kaile-committed; lokera-of
>|the people; nistara-liberation; ye-anyone who; toma'-You;
>|dekhila-saw; tara-his; chutila-became free; samsara-
>|material bondage.
982|TRANSLATION
983|"There was no offense in Your appearing as Nrsimhadeva.
>|Rather, any man who saw You in that mood was immediately
>|liberated from the bondage of material existence."
984|Adi 17.98
985|TEXT 98
986|TEXT
987|eta bali' srivasa karila sevana
988|tusta hana prabhu aila apana-bhavana
989|SYNONYMS
990|eta bali'-saying this; srivasa-Srivasa Thakura; karila-did;
>|sevana-worship; tusta-satisfied; hana-becoming; prabhu-the
>|Lord; aila-came back; apana-bhavana-to His own home.
991|TRANSLATION
992|After saying this, Srivasa Thakura worshiped the Lord, who
>|was then greatly satisfied and returned to His own home.
993|Adi 17.99
994|TEXT 99
995|TEXT
996|ara dina siva-bhakta siva-guna gaya
997|prabhura angane nace, damaru bajaya
998|SYNONYMS
999|ara dina-another day; siva-bhakta-a devotee of Lord Siva;
>|siva-guna-the qualities of Lord Siva; gaya-chants; prabhura-
>|of Lord Caitanya; angane-in the courtyard; nace-dances;
>|damaru-a kind of musical instrument; bajaya-plays on it.
1000|TRANSLATION
1001|On another day a great devotee of Lord Siva, chanting of
>|Lord Siva's qualities, came to Lord Caitanya's house, where
>|he began dancing in the courtyard and playing his damaru [a
>|musical instrument].
1002|Adi 17.100
1003|TEXT 100
1004|TEXT
1005|mahesa-avesa haila sacira nandana
1006|tara skandhe cadi nrtya kaila bahu-ksana
1007|SYNONYMS
1008|mahesa-avesa-in the mood of Lord Siva; haila-became; sacira-
>|of mother Saci; nandana-son; tara skandhe-on his shoulder;
>|cadi-getting on; nrtya-dance; kaila-did; bahu-ksana-for a
>|long time.
1009|TRANSLATION
1010|Then Lord Caitanya, adopting the mood of Lord Siva, got on
>|the man's shoulders, and thus they danced together for a
>|long time.
1011|PURPORT
1012|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu adopted the mood of Lord Siva, for
>|He is Siva also. According to the philosophy of acintya-
>|bhedabheda-tattva, Lord Siva is not different from Lord
>|Visnu, but still Lord Siva is not Lord Visnu, just as
>|yogurt is nothing but milk and yet is not milk nevertheless.
>| One cannot get the benefit of milk by drinking yogurt.
>|Similarly, one cannot get salvation by worshiping Lord Siva.
>| If one wants salvation, one must worship Lord Visnu. This
>|is confirmed in the Bhagavad-gita (9.4): mat-sthani sarva-
>|bhutani na caham tesv avasthitah. Everything is resting on
>|the Lord, for everything is His energy, yet He is
>|not everywhere. Lord Caitanya's adopting the mood of Lord
>|Siva is not extraordinary, but one should not therefore
>|think that by worshiping Lord Siva one is worshiping Lord
>|Caitanya. That would be a mistake.
1013|Adi 17.101
1014|TEXT 101
1015|TEXT
1016|ara dina eka bhiksuka aila magite
1017|prabhura nrtya dekhi nrtya lagila karite
1018|SYNONYMS
1019|ara-another; dina-day; eka-one; bhiksuka-beggar; aila-came;
>|magite-to beg; prabhura-of the Lord; nrtya-dancing; dekhi-
>|seeing; nrtya-dancing; lagila-began; karite-to perform.
1020|TRANSLATION
1021|On another day a mendicant came to beg alms from the Lord's
>|house, but when he saw the Lord dancing, he also began to
>|dance.
1022|Adi 17.102
1023|TEXT 102
1024|TEXT
1025|prabhu-sange nrtya kare parama ullase
1026|prabhu tare prema dila, prema-rase bhase
1027|SYNONYMS
1028|prabhu-sange-along with the Lord; nrtya kare-was dancing;
>|parama-very much; ullase-in satisfaction; prabhu-the Lord;
>|tare-him; prema-love of Godhead; dila-delivered; prema-rase-
>|in the mellows of love of God; bhase-began to float.
1029|TRANSLATION
1030|He danced with the Lord because he was favored by love of
>|Krsna. Thus he flowed in the mellows of love of Godhead.
1031|Adi 17.103
1032|TEXT 103
1033|TEXT
1034|ara dine jyotisa sarva-jna eka aila
1035|tahare sammana kari' prabhu prasna kaila
1036|SYNONYMS
1037|ara dine-some other day; jyotisa-an astrologer; sarva-jna-
>|who knows everything; eka-one; aila-came there; tahare-unto
>|him; sammana kari'-giving all honor; prabhu-the Lord;
>|prasna-question; kaila-put.
1038|TRANSLATION
1039|On another day an astrologer came who was said to know
>|everything-past, present and future. Thus Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu received him with all honor and put this
>|question before him.
1040|PURPORT
1041|Brahmanas generally used to become astrologers, Ayur-vedic
>|physicians, teachers and priests. Although highly learned
>|and respectable, such brahmanas went from door to door to
>|distribute their knowledge. A brahmana would first go to a
>|householder's home to give information about the functions
>|to be performed on a particular tithi, or date, but if
>|there were sickness in the family, the family members would
>|consult the brahmana as a physician, and the brahmana would
>|give instruction and some medicine. Often, since the
>|brahmanas were expert in astrology, people would also be
>|greatly inquisitive about their past, present and future.
1042|Although the brahmana appeared at Lord Caitanya's house as
>|a beggar, Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu received him with great
>|respect because he was a qualified brahmana who knew the
>|astrological science perfectly. Although brahmanas would go
>|door to door just like beggars, they were honored as very
>|respectable guests. This was the system in Hindu society
>|five hundred years ago, during the time of Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu. This system was current even one hundred years
>|ago; even fifty or sixty years ago, when we were children,
>|such brahmanas would visit householders like humble beggars,
>| and people would derive great benefit from the mercy of
>|such brahmanas. The greatest benefit was that a householder
>|could save a great deal of money from being spent on doctor
>|bills because the brahmanas, aside from explaining the past,
>| present and future, could ordinarily cure all kinds of
>|diseases simply by giving instructions and some medicine.
>|Thus no one was bereft of the benefit of a first-class
>|physician, astrologer and priest. The important members of
>|ISKCON should give careful attention to our Dallas school,
>|where children are being taught Sanskrit and English to
>|become perfect brahmanas. If they are actually trained as
>|perfect brahmanas, they can save society from rogues and
>|ruffians; indeed, people can live happily under the
>|protection of qualified brahmanas. Therefore the Bhagavad-
>|gita (4.13) gives special stress to the division of society
>|(catur-varnyam maya srstam guna-karma-vibhagasah).
>|Unfortunately some people are now claiming to be brahmanas
>|simply by birthright, with no qualifications. Therefore the
>|entire society is in chaos.
1043|Adi 17.104
1044|TEXT 104
1045|TEXT
1046|ke achilun ami purva janme kaha gani'
1047|ganite lagila sarva-jna prabhu-vakya suni'
1048|SYNONYMS
1049|ke achilun ami-who I was; purva janme-in My previous birth;
>|kaha-please say; gani'-by your astrological calculation;
>|ganite-to calculate; lagila-began; sarva-jna-a man who
>|knows past, present and future; prabhu-vakya-the words of
>|Lord Caitanya; suni'-hearing.
1050|TRANSLATION
1051|"Please tell Me who I was in My previous birth," the Lord
>|said. "Please tell Me by your astrological computations."
>|Hearing the words of the Lord, the astrologer immediately
>|began to calculate.
1052|PURPORT
1053|Through astrology one can know past, present and future.
>|Modern Western astrologers have no knowledge of the past or
>|future, nor can they perfectly say anything about the
>|present. Herein we find, however, that after hearing Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu's order, the astrologer immediately
>|began his calculations. This was not a facade: he actually
>|knew how to ascertain one's past life through astrology. A
>|still-existing treatise called the Bhrgu-samhita describes
>|a system by which anyone can immediately get information
>|about what he was in the past and what he is going to be in
>|the future. The brahmanas who went door to door as if
>|beggars had perfect command of such vast knowledge. Thus
>|the highest knowledge was easily available even to the
>|poorest man in society. The poorest man could inquire from
>|an astrologer about his past, present and future, with no
>|need for business agreements or exorbitant payments. The
>|brahmana would give him all the benefit of his knowledge
>|without asking remuneration, and the poor man, in return,
>|would offer a handful of rice, or anything he had in his
>|possession, to satisfy the brahmana. In a perfect human
>|society, perfect knowledge in any science-medical,
>|astrological, ecclesiastical and so on-is available even to
>|the poorest man, with no anxiety over payment. In the
>|present day, however, no one can get justice, medical
>|treatment, astrological help or ecclesiastical
>|enlightenment without money, and since people are generally
>|poor, they are bereft of the benefits of all these great
>|sciences.
1054|Adi 17.105
1055|TEXT 105
1056|TEXT
1057|gani' dhyane dekhe sarva-jna,-maha-jyotirmaya
1058|ananta vaikuntha-brahmanda-sabara asraya
1059|SYNONYMS
1060|gani'-by calculation; dhyane-by meditation; dekhe-sees;
>|sarva-jna-knower of everything; maha-jyotir-maya-highly
>|effulgent body; ananta-unlimited; vaikuntha-spiritual world;
>| brahmanda-planets; sabara-of all of them; asraya-shelter.
1061|TRANSLATION
1062|Through calculation and meditation, the all-knowing
>|astrologer saw the greatly effulgent body of the Lord,
>|which is the resting place of all the unlimited Vaikuntha
>|planets.
1063|PURPORT
1064|Here we get some information of the Vaikuntha world, or
>|spiritual world. Vaikuntha means "without anxiety." In the
>|material world, everyone is full of anxiety, but another
>|world, where there is no anxiety, is described in the
>|Bhagavad-gita (8.20):
1065|paras tasmat tu bhavo 'nyo 'vyakto 'vyaktat sanatanah
1066|yah sa sarvesu bhutesu nasyatsu na
>|vinasyati
1067|"Yet there is another unmanifest nature, which is eternal
>|and is transcendental to this manifested and unmanifested
>|matter. It is supreme and is never annihilated. When all in
>|this world is annihilated, that part remains as it is."
1068|As there are many planets within the material world, there
>|are many millions of planets, called Vaikunthalokas, in the
>|spiritual world. All these Vaikunthalokas, or superior
>|planets, rest on the effulgence of the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead. As stated in the Brahma-samhita (yasya prabha
>|prabhavato jagad-anda-koti- [Bs. 5.40]), the Brahman
>|effulgence emanating from the body of the Supreme Lord
>|creates innumerable planets in both the spiritual and
>|material worlds; thus these planets are creations of the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead. The astrologer saw Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu to be the very same Personality of
>|Godhead. We can just imagine how learned he was, yet he was
>|traveling door to door, just like an ordinary beggar, for
>|the highest benefit of human society.
1069|Adi 17.106
1070|TEXT 106
1071|TEXT
1072|parama-tattva, para-brahma, parama-isvara
1073|dekhi' prabhura murti sarva-jna ha-ila phanphara
1074|SYNONYMS
1075|parama-tattva-the Supreme Truth; para-brahma-the Supreme
>|Brahman; parama-isvara-the Supreme Lord; dekhi'-seeing;
>|prabhura-of the Lord; murti-form; sarva-jna-the all-knowing
>|astrologer; ha-ila-became; phanphara-confused.
1076|TRANSLATION
1077|Seeing Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu to be the same Absolute
>|Truth, the Supreme Brahman, the Personality of Godhead, the
>|astrologer was confused.
1078|PURPORT
1079|Herein it is clearly indicated that the Absolute Truth, the
>|Supreme Brahman, is, in the ultimate issue, the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead. Therefore a person is the beginning
>|of all things. As confirmed in the Bhagavad-gita (10.8),
>|mattah sarvam pravartate: everything begins from the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead. The Supreme Lord is the
>|supreme living entity. Therefore whatever exists, whether
>|matter or spirit, is all but an emanation from the Supreme
>|Person, or supreme life. The modern scientists' theory that
>|life begins from matter is nonsense. Both matter and life
>|begin from life. Unfortunately the scientists do not know
>|this scientific fact; they are drifting in the darkness of
>|their so-called knowledge.
1080|Adi 17.107
1081|TEXT 107
1082|TEXT
1083|balite na pare kichu, mauna ha-ila
1084|prabhu punah prasna kaila, kahite lagila
1085|SYNONYMS
1086|balite-to say; na pare-is not able; kichu-anything; mauna-
>|silent; ha-ila-became; prabhu-the Lord; punah-again; prasna-
>|question; kaila-put; kahite-to speak; lagila-began.
1087|TRANSLATION
1088|Struck with wonder, the astrologer remained silent, unable
>|to speak. But when the Lord again put the question before
>|him, he replied as follows.
1089|Adi 17.108
1090|TEXT 108
1091|TEXT
1092|purva janme chila tumi jagat-asraya
1093|paripurna bhagavan-sarvaisvaryamaya
1094|SYNONYMS
1095|purva janme-in the previous birth; chila-were; tumi-You;
>|jagat-universe; asraya-shelter; paripurna-with full
>|potencies; bhagavan-the Supreme Personality of Godhead;
>|sarva-aisvarya-maya-full of all opulences.
1096|TRANSLATION
1097|"My dear sir, in Your previous birth You were the shelter
>|of all creation, the Supreme Personality of Godhead, full
>|of all opulences.
1098|Adi 17.109
1099|TEXT 109
1100|TEXT
1101|purve yaiche chila tumi ebeha se-rupa
1102|durvijneya nityananda-tomara svarupa
1103|SYNONYMS
1104|purve-in the past; yaiche-as much as; chila-You were; tumi-
>|You; ebeha-now also; se-rupa-the same thing; durvijneya-
>|inconceivable; nityananda-eternal happiness; tomara-Your;
>|svarupa-identity.
1105|TRANSLATION
1106|"You are now the same Personality of Godhead that You were
>|in Your previous birth. Your identity is inconceivable
>|eternal happiness."
1107|PURPORT
1108|By the power of astrological science one can even ascertain
>|the position of the Supreme Personality of Godhead.
>|Everything is to be identified by its symptoms. The Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead is identified by the symptoms
>|mentioned in the sastras. It is not that anyone and
>|everyone can become God without proof from sastras.
1109|Adi 17.110
1110|TEXT 110
1111|TEXT
1112|prabhu hasi' kaila,-tumi kichu na janila
1113|purve ami achilan jatite goyala
1114|SYNONYMS
1115|prabhu-the Lord; hasi'-smiling; kaila-said; tumi-you; kichu-
>|anything; na-not; janila-know; purve-in the past; ami-I;
>|achilan-was; jatite-by caste; goyala-cowherd.
1116|TRANSLATION
1117|When the astrologer was speaking so highly of Him, Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu stopped him and began to smile. "My
>|dear sir," He said, "I think you do not know very clearly
>|what I was, for I know that in My previous birth I was a
>|cowherd boy.
1118|Adi 17.111
1119|TEXT 111
1120|TEXT
1121|gopa-grhe janma chila, gabhira rakhala
1122|sei punye hailan ebe brahmana-chaoyala
1123|SYNONYMS
1124|gopa-grhe-in the house of a cowherd; janma-birth; chila-
>|there was; gabhira-of the cows; rakhala-protector; sei
>|punye-by those pious activities; hailan-became; ebe-now;
>|brahmana-of a brahmana; chaoyala-son.
1125|TRANSLATION
1126|"In My last birth I was born in the family of cowherd men,
>|and I gave protection to the calves and cows. Because of
>|such pious activities, I have now become the son of a
>|brahmana."
1127|PURPORT
1128|The words of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu, the greatest
>|authority, herein clearly indicate that one becomes pious
>|simply by keeping cows and protecting them. Unfortunately,
>|people have become such rascals that they do not even care
>|about the words of an authority. People generally consider
>|cowherd men lowly members of society, but herein Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu confirms that they are so pious that in their
>|next lives they are going to be brahmanas. The caste system
>|has a specific purpose. If this scientific system is
>|followed, human society will get the greatest benefit.
>|Heeding this instruction by the Lord, people should serve
>|cows and calves and in return get ample quantities of milk.
>|There is no loss in serving the cows and calves, but modern
>|human society has become so degraded that instead of giving
>|protection to the cows and serving them, people are killing
>|them. How can they expect peace and prosperity in human
>|society while committing such sinful activities? It is
>|impossible.
1129|Adi 17.112
1130|TEXT 112
1131|TEXT
1132|sarva-jna kahe ami taha dhyane dekhilan
1133|tahate aisvarya dekhi' phanphara ha-ilan
1134|SYNONYMS
1135|sarva-jna-the all-knowing astrologer; kahe-says; ami-I;
>|taha-that; dhyane-in meditation; dekhilan-saw; tahate-there;
>| aisvarya-opulence; dekhi'-by seeing; phanphara-confused;
>|ha-ilan-became.
1136|TRANSLATION
1137|The astrologer said, "What I saw in meditation was full of
>|opulence, and therefore I was confused.
1138|PURPORT
1139|It appears that the astrologer not only was a knower of
>|past, present and future through astrological calculation,
>|but was a great meditator as well. Therefore he was a great
>|devotee and could see Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu to be the
>|same personality as Krsna. He was puzzled, however, about
>|whether Krsna and Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu were actually the
>|same person.
1140|Adi 17.113
1141|TEXT 113
1142|TEXT
1143|sei-rupe ei-rupe dekhi ekakara
1144|kabhu bheda dekhi, ei mayaya tomara
1145|SYNONYMS
1146|sei-rupe-in that form; ei-rupe-in this form; dekhi-I see;
>|eka-akara-one form; kabhu-sometimes; bheda-difference;
>|dekhi-I see; ei-this; mayaya tomara-Your maya.
1147|TRANSLATION
1148|"I am certain that Your form and the form I saw in my
>|meditation are one and the same. If I see any difference,
>|this is an act of Your illusory energy."
1149|PURPORT
1150|Sri-krsna-caitanya radha-krsna nahe anya: in the vision of
>|a perfect devotee, Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu is a
>|combination of Radha and Krsna. One who sees Lord Caitanya
>|to be different from Krsna is under the illusory energy of
>|the Lord. It appears that the astrologer was already an
>|advanced devotee, and when he came into the presence of the
>|Supreme Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, he became perfectly
>|self-realized and could see that the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead Krsna and Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu are one and the
>|same Supreme Person.
1151|Adi 17.114
1152|TEXT 114
1153|TEXT
1154|ye hao, se hao tumi, tomake namaskara
1155|prabhu tare prema diya kaila puraskara
1156|SYNONYMS
1157|ye hao-whatever You are; se hao tumi-whatever You may be;
>|tomake-unto You; namaskara-my obeisances; prabhu-the Lord;
>|tare-unto him; prema-love of Godhead; diya-delivered; kaila-
>|did; puraskara-honor.
1158|TRANSLATION
1159|The all-knowing astrologer concluded, "Whatever You may be
>|or whoever You may be, I offer my respectful obeisances
>|unto You!" By His causeless mercy, the Lord then gave him
>|love of Godhead, thus rewarding him for his service.
1160|PURPORT
1161|The incident of Lord Caitanya's meeting the all-knowing
>|astrologer is not mentioned in the Caitanya-bhagavata, but
>|we cannot therefore say that it did not take place. On the
>|contrary, we must accept the statement of Krsnadasa
>|Kaviraja Gosvami that whatever the Caitanya-bhagavata did
>|not mention he has especially mentioned in the Caitanya-
>|caritamrta.
1162|Adi 17.115
1163|TEXT 115
1164|TEXT
1165|eka dina prabhu visnu-mandape vasiya
1166|'madhu ana', 'madhu ana' balena dakiya
1167|SYNONYMS
1168|eka dina-one day; prabhu-the Lord; visnu-mandape-in the
>|corridor of a Visnu temple; vasiya-sitting; madhu ana-bring
>|honey; madhu ana-bring honey; balena-says; dakiya-calling
>|loudly.
1169|TRANSLATION
1170|One day the Lord sat down in the corridor of a Visnu temple
>|and began calling very loudly, "Bring some honey! Bring
>|some honey!"
1171|Adi 17.116
1172|TEXT 116
1173|TEXT
1174|nityananda-gosani prabhura avesa janila
1175|ganga-jala-patra ani' sammukhe dharila
1176|SYNONYMS
1177|nityananda-gosani-Lord Nityananda Prabhu; prabhura-of the
>|Lord; avesa-ecstasy; janila-could understand; ganga-jala-
>|Ganges water; patra-pot; ani'-bringing; sammukhe-in front;
>|dharila-placed it.
1178|TRANSLATION
1179|Nityananda Prabhu Gosani, understanding the ecstatic mood
>|of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, brought a pot of Ganges water
>|as a token and put it before Him.
1180|Adi 17.117
1181|TEXT 117
1182|TEXT
1183|jala pana kariya nace hana vihvala
1184|yamunakarsana-lila dekhaye sakala
1185|SYNONYMS
1186|jala-water; pana kariya-after drinking; nace-dances; hana-
>|becoming; vihvala-ecstatic; yamuna-akarsana-attracting the
>|river Yamuna; lila-pastimes; dekhaye-sees; sakala-everyone.
1187|TRANSLATION
1188|After drinking the water, Lord Caitanya became so ecstatic
>|that He began to dance. Thus everyone saw the pastime of
>|attracting the river Yamuna.
1189|PURPORT
1190|Yamunakarsana-lila is the pastime of attracting the Yamuna.
>|One day, Sri Baladeva wanted the Yamuna River to come
>|before Him, and when the river Yamuna refused, He took His
>|plow, wanting to dig a canal so that the Yamuna would be
>|obliged to come there. Since Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu is the
>|original form of Baladeva, in His ecstasy He asked everyone
>|to bring honey. In this way, all the devotees standing
>|there saw the yamunakarsana-lila. In this lila, Baladeva
>|was accompanied by His girlfriends. After drinking a honey
>|beverage called Varuni, He wanted to jump into the Yamuna
>|and swim with the girls. It is stated in Srimad-Bhagavatam (
>|10.65.25 –30, 33) that Lord Baladeva asked the Yamuna to
>|come near, and when the river disobeyed the order of the
>|Lord, He became angry and thus wanted to snatch her near to
>|Him with His plow. The Yamuna, however, very much afraid
>|of Lord Balarama's anger, immediately came and surrendered
>|unto Him, praying to the Lord, the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead, and admitting her fault. She was then excused.
>|This is the sum and substance of the yamunakarsana-lila.
>|The incident is also described in the prayer of Jayadeva
>|Gosvami concerning the ten incarnations:
1191|vahasi vapusi visade vasanam jaladabham
1192|halahati-bhiti-milita-yamunabham
1193|kesava dhrta-haladhara-rupa jaya jagad-isa hare
1194|Adi 17.118
1195|TEXT 118
1196|TEXT
1197|mada-matta-gati baladeva-anukara
1198|acarya sekhara tanre dekhe ramakara
1199|SYNONYMS
1200|mada-matta-being intoxicated by drinking Varuni; gati-
>|movement; baladeva-Lord Baladeva; anukara-imitating; acarya-
>|Advaita Acarya; sekhara-at the head; tanre-Him; dekhe-sees;
>|rama-akara-in the form of Balarama.
1201|TRANSLATION
1202|When the Lord, in His ecstasy of Baladeva, was moving as if
>|intoxicated by the beverage, Advaita Acarya, the chief of
>|the acaryas [acarya sekhara], saw Him in the form of
>|Balarama.
1203|Adi 17.119
1204|TEXT 119
1205|TEXT
1206|vanamali acarya dekhe sonara langala
1207|sabe mili' nrtya kare avese vihvala
1208|SYNONYMS
1209|vanamali acarya-Vanamali Acarya; dekhe-sees;
>|sonara-made of gold; langala-plow; sabe-all; mili'-meeting
>|together; nrtya-dance; kare-perform; avese-in ecstasy;
>|vihvala-overwhelmed.
1210|TRANSLATION
1211|Vanamali Acarya saw a golden plow in the hand of Balarama,
>|and the devotees all assembled together and danced,
>|overwhelmed by ecstasy.
1212|Adi 17.120
1213|TEXT 120
1214|TEXT
1215|ei-mata nrtya ha-ila cari prahara
1216|sandhyaya ganga-snana kari' sabe gela ghara
1217|SYNONYMS
1218|ei-mata-in this way; nrtya-dancing; ha-ila-was performed;
>|cari-four; prahara-a period of time lasting three hours;
>|sandhyaya-in the evening; ganga-snana-taking bath in the
>|Ganges; kari'-finishing; sabe-all; gela-returned; ghara-
>|home.
1219|TRANSLATION
1220|In this way they danced continuously for twelve hours, and
>|in the evening they all took a bath in the Ganges and then
>|returned to their homes.
1221|Adi 17.121
1222|TEXT 121
1223|TEXT
1224|nagariya loke prabhu yabe ajna dila
1225|ghare ghare sankirtana karite lagila
1226|SYNONYMS
1227|nagariya-citizens; loke-all the people; prabhu-the Lord;
>|yabe-when; ajna-order; dila-gave; ghare ghare-in each and
>|every home; sankirtana-chanting of the Hare Krsna mantra;
>|karite-to perform; lagila-began.
1228|TRANSLATION
1229|The Lord ordered all the citizens of Navadvipa to chant the
>|Hare Krsna mantra, and in each and every home they began
>|performing sankirtana regularly.
1230|Adi 17.122
1231|TEXT 122
1232|TEXT
1233|'haraye namah, krsna yadavaya namah
1234|gopala govinda rama sri-madhusudana'
1235|SYNONYMS
1236|haraye namah-I offer my respectful obeisances to Lord Hari;
>|krsna-O Krsna; yadavaya-unto the descendant of the Yadu
>|dynasty; namah-all obeisances; gopala-Gopala;
>|govinda- Govinda; rama- Rama; sri-
>|madhusudana- Sri Madhusudana.
1237|TRANSLATION
1238|[All the devotees sang this popular song along with the
>|Hare Krsna maha-mantra.] "Haraye namah, krsna yadavaya
>|namah/ gopala govinda rama sri-madhusudana."
1239|Adi 17.123
1240|TEXT 123
1241|TEXT
1242|mrdanga-karatala sankirtana-mahadhvani
1243|'hari' 'hari'-dhvani vina anya nahi suni
1244|SYNONYMS
1245|mrdanga-drum; karatala-hand bells; sankirtana-chanting of
>|the holy name of the Lord; maha-dhvani-great vibration;
>|hari-the Lord; hari-the Lord; dhvani-sound; vina-except;
>|anya-another; nahi-not; suni-one can hear.
1246|TRANSLATION
1247|When the sankirtana movement thus started, no one in
>|Navadvipa could hear any sound other than the words "Hari!
>|Hari!" and the beating of the mrdanga and clashing of hand
>|bells.
1248|PURPORT
1249|The International Society for Krishna Consciousness now has
>|its world center in Navadvipa, Mayapur. The managers of
>|this center should see that twenty-four hours a day there
>|is chanting of the holy names of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra,
>| with the addition of haraye namah, krsna yadavaya namah,
>|for this song was a favorite of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's.
>|But all such sankirtana must be preceded by the chanting of
>|the holy names of the five tattvas-sri-krsna-caitanya
>|prabhu-nityananda sri-advaita gadadhara srivasadi-gaura-
>|bhakta-vrnda. We are already accustomed to chant these two
>|mantras-sri-krsna-caitanya prabhu-nityananda sri-advaita
>|gadadhara srivasadi-gaura-bhakta-vrnda and Hare Krsna, Hare
>|Krsna, Krsna Krsna, Hare Hare/ Hare Rama, Hare Rama, Rama
>|Rama, Hare Hare. Now, after these, the other two lines-
>|namely haraye namah, krsna yadavaya namah / gopala
>|govinda rama sri-madhusudana-should be added, especially in
>|Mayapur. Chanting of these six lines should go on so
>|perfectly well that no one there hears any vibration other
>|than the chanting of the holy names of the Lord. That will
>|make the center spiritually all-perfect.
1250|Adi 17.124
1251|TEXT 124
1252|TEXT
1253|suniya ye kruddha haila sakala yavana
1254|kaji-pase asi' sabe kaila nivedana
1255|SYNONYMS
1256|suniya-by hearing; ye-that; kruddha-angry; haila-became;
>|sakala-all; yavana-Muslims; kaji-pase-in the court of the
>|Kazi, or magistrate; asi'-coming; sabe-all; kaila-made;
>|nivedana-petition.
1257|TRANSLATION
1258|Hearing the resounding vibration of the Hare Krsna mantra,
>|the local Muslims, greatly angry, submitted a complaint to
>|the Kazi.
1259|PURPORT
1260|The phaujadara, or city magistrate, was called the kaji (
>|Kazi). The jamidaras (zamindars), or landholders (
>|mandaleras), levied taxes on the land, but keeping law and
>|order and punishing criminals was the duty entrusted to the
>|Kazi. Both the Kazi and the landholders were under the
>|control of the governor of Bengal, which at that time was
>|known as Suba-bangala. The districts of Nadia, Islampura
>|and Bagoyana were all under the zamindar named Hari Hoda or
>|his descendant known as Hoda Krsnadasa. It is
>|said that Chand Kazi was the spiritual master of Nawab
>|Hussain Shah. According to one opinion his name was Maulana
>|Sirajuddina, and according to another his name was Habibara
>|Rahamana. Descendants of Chand Kazi are still living in the
>|vicinity of Mayapur. People still go to see the tomb of
>|Chand Kazi, which is underneath a campaka tree and is known
>|as Chand Kazi's samadhi.
1261|Adi 17.125
1262|TEXT 125
1263|TEXT
1264|krodhe sandhya-kale kaji eka ghare aila
1265|mrdanga bhangiya loke kahite lagila
1266|SYNONYMS
1267|krodhe-in anger; sandhya-kale-in the evening; kaji-the
>|Chand Kazi; eka ghare-in one home; aila-came; mrdanga-drum;
>|bhangiya-breaking; loke-unto the people; kahite-to speak;
>|lagila-began.
1268|TRANSLATION
1269|Chand Kazi angrily came to one home in the evening, and
>|when he saw kirtana going on, he broke a mrdanga and spoke
>|as follows.
1270|Adi 17.126
1271|TEXT 126
1272|TEXT
1273|eta-kala keha nahi kaila hinduyani
1274|ebe ye udyama calao kara bala jani'
1275|SYNONYMS
1276|eta-kala-so long; keha-anyone; nahi-not; kaila-performed;
>|hinduyani-regulative principles of the Hindus; ebe-now; ye-
>|that; udyama-endeavor; calao-you propagate; kara-whose;
>|bala-strength; jani'-I want to know.
1277|TRANSLATION
1278|"For so long you did not follow the regulative principles
>|of the Hindu religion, but now you are following them with
>|great enthusiasm. May I know by whose strength you are
>|doing so?
1279|PURPORT
1280|It appears that from the aggression of Baktiyar Khiliji in
>|Bengal until the time of Chand Kazi, Hindus, or the
>|followers of the Vedic principles, were greatly suppressed.
>|Like the Hindus in present-day Pakistan, practically no one
>|could execute the Hindu religious principles freely. Chand
>|Kazi referred to this condition of Hindu society. Formerly
>|the Hindus had not been straightforward in executing their
>|Hindu principles, but now they were freely chanting the
>|Hare Krsna maha-mantra. Therefore it must have been by the
>|strength of someone else that they were so daring.
1281|Actually, that was the fact. Although the members of the so-
>|called Hindu society had followed the social customs and
>|formulas, they had practically forgotten to execute their
>|religious principles strictly. But with the presence of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu they actually began following the
>|regulative principles according to His order. That order is
>|still existing, and anywhere and everywhere, in all parts
>|of the world, one can execute it. That order is to become a
>|spiritual master under the direction of Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu by following the regulative principles, chanting
>|daily at least sixteen rounds of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra,
>| and preaching the cult of Krsna consciousness all over the
>|world. If we adhere to the order of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu,
>| we shall get spiritual strength without a doubt, and we
>|shall be free to preach this cult of the Hare Krsna
>|movement and not be hampered by anyone.
1282|Adi 17.127
1283|TEXT 127
1284|TEXT
1285|keha kirtana na kariha sakala nagare
1286|aji ami ksama kari' yaitechon ghare
1287|SYNONYMS
1288|keha-anyone; kirtana-chanting of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra;
>| na-do not; kariha-perform; sakala nagare-in the whole town;
>| aji-today; ami-I; ksama kari'-excusing; yaitechon-am
>|returning; ghare-home.
1289|TRANSLATION
1290|"No one should perform sankirtana on the streets of the
>|city. Today I am excusing the offense and returning home.
1291|PURPORT
1292|Such orders stopping sankirtana in the streets of the world'
>|s great cities have been imposed upon members of the Hare
>|Krsna movement. We have hundreds of centers all over the
>|world, and we have been specifically persecuted in
>|Australia. In most cities of the Western world we have been
>|arrested many times by the police, but we are nevertheless
>|executing the order of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu by chanting
>|on the streets of all the important cities, such as New
>|York, London, Chicago, Sydney, Melbourne, Paris and Hamburg.
>| We must remember that such incidents took place in the
>|past, five hundred years ago, and the fact that they are
>|still going on indicates that our sankirtana movement is
>|really authorized, for if sankirtana were an insignificant
>|material affair, demons would not object to it. The demons
>|of the time tried to obstruct the sankirtana movement
>|started by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu. Similar demons are
>|trying to obstruct the sankirtana movement we are executing
>|all over the world, and this proves that our sankirtana
>|movement is still pure and genuine, following in the
>|footsteps of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
1293|Adi 17.128
1294|TEXT 128
1295|TEXT
1296|ara yadi kirtana karite laga paimu
1297|sarvasva dandiya tara jati ye la-imu
1298|SYNONYMS
1299|ara-again; yadi-if; kirtana-chanting of the Hare Krsna maha-
>|mantra; karite-to do; laga-contact; paimu-I shall take;
>|sarva-sva-all possessions; dandiya-chastising; tara-his;
>|jati-caste; ye-that; la-imu-I shall take.
1300|TRANSLATION
1301|"The next time I see someone performing such sankirtana, I
>|shall certainly chastise him by not only confiscating all
>|his property but also converting him into a Muslim."
1302|PURPORT
1303|To convert a Hindu into a Muslim was an easy affair in
>|those days. If a Muslim simply sprinkled water on the body
>|of a Hindu, it was supposed that the Hindu had already
>|become a Muslim. During the transition of the British in
>|Bangladesh during the last Hindu-Muslim riots, many Hindus
>|were converted into Muslims by having cows' flesh forcibly
>|pushed into their mouths. Hindu society was so rigid at the
>|time of Lord Caitanya that if a Hindu were converted into a
>|Muslim, there was no chance of his being reformed. In this
>|way the Muslim population in India increased. None of the
>|Muslims came from outside; social customs somehow or other
>|forced Hindus to become Muslims, with no chance of
>|returning to Hindu society. Emperor Aurangzeb also
>|inaugurated a tax that Hindus had to pay because of their
>|being Hindus. Thus all the poor Hindus of the lower class
>|voluntarily became Muslims to avoid the tax. In this way
>|the Muslim population in India increased. Chand Kazi
>|threatened to convert the people into Muslims by the simple
>|process of sprinkling water on their bodies.
1304|Adi 17.129
1305|TEXT 129
1306|TEXT
1307|eta bali' kaji gela,-nagariya loka
1308|prabhu-sthane nivedila pana bada soka
1309|SYNONYMS
1310|eta bali'-thus saying; kaji-the magistrate; gela-returned;
>|nagariya loka-the citizens in general; prabhu-sthane-before
>|the Lord; nivedila-submitted; pana-getting; bada-very much;
>|soka-shock.
1311|TRANSLATION
1312|After saying this, the Kazi returned home, and the devotees,
>| greatly shocked that they were forbidden to chant Hare
>|Krsna, submitted their grief to Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
1313|Adi 17.130
1314|TEXT 130
1315|TEXT
1316|prabhu ajna dila-yaha karaha kirtana
1317|muni samharimu aji sakala yavana
1318|SYNONYMS
1319|prabhu-the Lord; ajna dila-ordered; yaha-go; karaha-and
>|perform; kirtana-sankirtana, chanting of the Hare Krsna
>|maha-mantra; muni-I; samharimu-shall kill; aji-today;
>|sakala-all; yavana-the Muslims.
1320|TRANSLATION
1321|Lord Caitanya ordered, "Go perform sankirtana! Today I
>|shall kill all the Muslims!"
1322|PURPORT
1323|Gandhi is known for having started the movement of
>|nonviolent civil disobedience in India, but about five
>|hundred years before him, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu started
>|His movement of nonviolent civil disobedience to the order
>|of Chand Kazi. It is not necessary to commit violence to
>|stop the opposition from hindering a movement, for one can
>|kill their demoniac behavior with reason and argument.
>|Following in the footsteps of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu,
>|whenever there are obstacles the Hare Krsna movement should
>|kill the opposition with reason and argument and thus stop
>|their demoniac behavior. If we became violent in every case,
>| it would be difficult for us to manage our affairs. We
>|should therefore follow in the footsteps of Lord Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, who disobeyed the order of Chand Kazi but
>|subdued him with reason and argument.
1324|Adi 17.131
1325|TEXT 131
1326|TEXT
1327|ghare giya saba loka karaye kirtana
1328|kajira bhaye svacchanda nahe, camakita mana
1329|SYNONYMS
1330|ghare giya-returning home; saba-all; loka-citizens; karaye-
>|performed; kirtana-sankirtana; kajira-of the Kazi; bhaye-
>|from fear; svacchanda-carefree; nahe-not; camakita-always
>|full of anxieties; mana-the mind.
1331|TRANSLATION
1332|Returning home, all the citizens began performing
>|sankirtana, but because of the order of the Kazi, they were
>|not carefree but always full of anxiety.
1333|Adi 17.132
1334|TEXT 132
1335|TEXT
1336|ta-sabhara antare bhaya prabhu mane jani
1337|kahite lagila loke sighra daki' ani'
1338|SYNONYMS
1339|ta-sabhara-of all of them; antare-in the mind; bhaya-fear;
>|prabhu-the Lord; mane-in the mind; jani-understanding;
>|kahite-to speak; lagila-began; loke-to the people; sighra-
>|very soon; daki'-calling; ani'-bringing them.
1340|TRANSLATION
1341|Understanding the anxiety within the people's minds, the
>|Lord called them together and spoke to them as follows.
1342|Adi 17.133
1343|TEXT 133
1344|TEXT
1345|nagare nagare aji karimu kirtana
1346|sandhya-kale kara sabhe nagara-mandana
1347|SYNONYMS
1348|nagare-from town; nagare-to town; aji-today; karimu-I shall
>|perform; kirtana-chanting of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra;
>|sandhya-kale-in the evening; kara-do; sabhe-all; nagara-of
>|the city; mandana-decoration.
1349|TRANSLATION
1350|"In the evening I shall perform sankirtana in each and
>|every town. Therefore you should all decorate the city in
>|the evening.
1351|PURPORT
1352|At that time, Navadvipa was composed of nine small cities,
>|so the words nagare nagare are significant. Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu wanted to perform kirtana in each of these
>|neighboring towns. He ordered the city decorated for the
>|function.
1353|Adi 17.134
1354|TEXT 134
1355|TEXT
1356|sandhyate deuti sabe jvala ghare ghare
1357|dekha, kona kaji asi' more mana kare
1358|SYNONYMS
1359|sandhyate-in the evening; deuti-lamps; sabe-everyone; jvala-
>|light up; ghare ghare-in each and every home; dekha-just
>|wait and see; kona-which kind; kaji-magistrate; asi'-coming;
>| more-unto Me; mana kare-orders Me to stop.
1360|TRANSLATION
1361|"In the evening, burn torchlights in every home. I shall
>|give protection to everyone. Let us see what kind of Kazi
>|comes to stop our kirtana."
1362|Adi 17.135
1363|TEXT 135
1364|TEXT
1365|eta kahi' sandhya-kale cale gauraraya
1366|kirtanera kaila prabhu tina sampradaya
1367|SYNONYMS
1368|eta kahi'-saying this; sandhya-kale-in the evening; cale-
>|went out; gaura-raya-Gaurasundara; kirtanera-of performing
>|sankirtana; kaila-made; prabhu-the Lord; tina-three;
>|sampradaya-parties.
1369|TRANSLATION
1370|In the evening Lord Gaurasundara went out and formed three
>|parties to perform kirtana.
1371|PURPORT
1372|This is a scheme for performing kirtana in a procession.
>|During Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's time, one party was
>|composed of twenty-one men: four people playing mrdangas,
>|one leading the chanting, and sixteen others striking
>|karatalas, responding to the leading chanter. If many men
>|join the sankirtana movement, they may follow in the
>|footsteps of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and form different
>|parties according to the time and the number of men
>|available.
1373|Adi 17.136
1374|TEXT 136
1375|TEXT
1376|age sampradaye nrtya kare haridasa
1377|madhye nace acarya-gosani parama ullasa
1378|SYNONYMS
1379|age-in front; sampradaye-in the party; nrtya-dancing; kare-
>|does; haridasa-Thakura Haridasa; madhye-in the middle; nace-
>|dances; acarya-gosani-Sri Advaita Acarya; parama-very;
>|ullasa-happy.
1380|TRANSLATION
1381|In the front party danced Thakura Haridasa, and in the
>|middle party danced Advaita Acarya with great jubilation.
1382|Adi 17.137
1383|TEXT 137
1384|TEXT
1385|pache sampradaye nrtya kare gauracandra
1386|tanra sange naci' bule prabhu nityananda
1387|SYNONYMS
1388|pache-at the rear; sampradaye-in the party; nrtya-dancing;
>|kare-does; gauracandra-Lord Gauranga; tanra-His; sange-
>|along with; naci'-dancing; bule-moves; prabhu-Lord;
>|nityananda-Nityananda.
1389|TRANSLATION
1390|Lord Gaurasundara Himself danced in the rear party, and Sri
>|Nityananda Prabhu moved with Lord Caitanya's dancing.
1391|Adi 17.138
1392|TEXT 138
1393|TEXT
1394|vrndavana-dasa iha 'caitanya-mangale'
1395|vistari' varniyachena, prabhu-krpa-bale
1396|SYNONYMS
1397|vrndavana-dasa-Vrndavana dasa Thakura; iha-this; caitanya-
>|mangale-in his book named Caitanya-mangala; vistari'-
>|elaborately; varniyachena-has described; prabhu-of the Lord;
>| krpa-bale-by the strength of mercy.
1398|TRANSLATION
1399|By the grace of the Lord, Srila Vrndavana dasa Thakura has
>|elaborately described this incident in his Caitanya-mangala
>|[now Caitanya-bhagavata].
1400|Adi 17.139
1401|TEXT 139
1402|TEXT
1403|ei mata kirtana kari' nagare bhramila
1404|bhramite bhramite sabhe kaji-dvare gela
1405|SYNONYMS
1406|ei mata-in this way; kirtana-congregational chanting; kari'-
>|executing; nagare-in the city; bhramila-circumambulated;
>|bhramite bhramite-while thus moving; sabhe-all of them;
>|kaji-dvare-at the door of the Kazi; gela-reached.
1407|TRANSLATION
1408|Performing kirtana in this way, circumambulating through
>|every nook and corner of the city, they finally reached the
>|door of the Kazi.
1409|Adi 17.140
1410|TEXT 140
1411|TEXT
1412|tarja-garja kare loka, kare kolahala
1413|gauracandra-bale loka prasraya-pagala
1414|SYNONYMS
1415|tarja-garja-murmuring in anger; kare-do; loka-the people;
>|kare-do; kolahala-roaring; gauracandra-of Lord Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; bale-by the power; loka-people; prasraya-pagala-
>|became mad by such indulgence.
1416|TRANSLATION
1417|Murmuring in anger and making a roaring sound, the people,
>|under the protection of Lord Caitanya, became mad through
>|such indulgence.
1418|PURPORT
1419|The Kazi had issued an order not to perform kirtana,
>|congregational chanting of the holy name of the Lord. But
>|when this was brought up to Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu, He
>|ordered civil disobedience to the Kazi's order. Lord
>|Caitanya and all His devotees, naturally enthusiastic
>|although agitated, must have made a great noise with their
>|loud cries.
1420|Adi 17.141
1421|TEXT 141
1422|TEXT
1423|kirtanera dhvanite kaji lukaila ghare
1424|tarjana garjana suni' na haya bahire
1425|SYNONYMS
1426|kirtanera-of the sankirtana movement; dhvanite-by the sound;
>| kaji-the Chand Kazi; lukaila-hid himself; ghare-in the
>|room; tarjana-murmuring; garjana-protesting; suni'-hearing;
>|na-does not; haya-come out; bahire-outside.
1427|TRANSLATION
1428|The loud sound of the chanting of the Hare Krsna mantra
>|certainly made the Kazi very much afraid, and he hid
>|himself within his room. Hearing the people thus protesting,
>| murmuring in great anger, the Kazi would not come out of
>|his home.
1429|PURPORT
1430|The Kazi's order not to perform sankirtana could stand only
>|as long as there was no civil disobedience. Under the
>|leadership of the Supreme Lord, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu,
>|the chanters, increasing in number, disobeyed the order of
>|the Kazi. Thousands assembled together and formed parties,
>|chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra and making a tumultuous
>|sound of protest. Thus the Kazi was very much afraid, as
>|naturally one should be under such circumstances.
1431|In the present day also, people all over the world may join
>|together in the Krsna consciousness movement and protest
>|against the present degraded governments of the world's
>|godless societies, which are based on all kinds of sinful
>|activities. Srimad-Bhagavatam states that in the Age of
>|Kali, thieves, rogues and fourth-class people who have
>|neither education nor culture capture the seats of
>|governments to exploit the citizens. This is a symptom of
>|Kali-yuga that has already appeared. People cannot feel
>|secure about their lives and property, yet the so-called
>|governments continue, and government ministers get fat
>|salaries, although they are unable to do anything good for
>|society. The only remedy for such conditions is to enhance
>|the sankirtana movement under the banner of Krsna
>|consciousness and protest against the sinful activities of
>|all the world's governments.
1432|The Krsna consciousness movement is not a sentimental
>|religious movement; it is a movement for the reformation of
>|all the anomalies of human society. If people take to it
>|seriously, discharging this duty scientifically, as ordered
>|by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, the world will see peace and
>|prosperity instead of being confused and hopeless under
>|useless governments. There are always rogues and thieves in
>|human society, and as soon as a weak government is unable
>|to execute its duties, these rogues and thieves come out to
>|do their business. Thus the entire society becomes a hell
>|unfit for gentlemen to live in. There is an immediate need
>|for a good government-a government by the people, with
>|Krsna consciousness. Unless the masses of people become
>|Krsna conscious, they cannot be good men. The Krsna
>|consciousness movement that Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu started
>|by chanting the Hare Krsna maha-mantra still has its
>|potency. Therefore people should understand it seriously
>|and scientifically and spread it all over the world.
1433|The sankirtana movement started by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu
>|is described in the Caitanya-bhagavata, Madhya-khanda,
>|Twenty-third Chapter, beginning with verse 241, which
>|states, "My dear Lord, let my mind be fixed at Your lotus
>|feet." Following Lord Caitanya's chanting, all the devotees
>|reproduced the same sound He chanted. In this way the Lord
>|proceeded, leading the entire party on the strand roads by
>|the bank of the Ganges. When the Lord came to His own ghata,
>| or bathing place, He danced more and more. Then He
>|proceeded to Madhai's ghata. In this way Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, the Supreme Lord, who was known as Visvambhara,
>|danced all over the banks of the Ganges. Then He proceeded
>|to Barakona-ghata, then Nagariya-ghata, and, traveling
>|through Ganganagara, reached Simuliya, a quarter at one end
>|of the town. All these places surround Sri Mayapur. After
>|reaching Simuliya, the Lord proceeded toward the Kazi's
>|house, and in this way He reached the door of Chand Kazi.
1434|Adi 17.142
1435|TEXT 142
1436|TEXT
1437|uddhata loka bhange kajira ghara-puspavana
1438|vistari' varnila iha dasa-vrndavana
1439|SYNONYMS
1440|uddhata-agitated; loka-persons; bhange-break; kajira-of the
>|Kazi; ghara-house; puspa-vana-flower garden; vistari'-
>|elaborately; varnila-described; iha-this; dasa-vrndavana-
>|Srila Vrndavana dasa Thakura.
1441|TRANSLATION
1442|Naturally some of the people who were very much agitated
>|began to retaliate the Kazi's actions by wrecking his house
>|and flower garden. Srila Vrndavana dasa Thakura has
>|elaborately described this incident.
1443|Adi 17.143
1444|TEXT 143
1445|TEXT
1446|tabe mahaprabhu tara dvarete vasila
1447|bhavya-loka pathaiya kajire bolaila
1448|SYNONYMS
1449|tabe-thereafter; mahaprabhu-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; tara
>|dvarete-at the Kazi's door; vasila-sat down; bhavya-loka-
>|respectable persons; pathaiya-sending; kajire-unto the Kazi;
>| bolaila-had them call.
1450|TRANSLATION
1451|Thereafter, when Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu reached the Kazi's
>|house, He sat down by the doorway and sent some respectable
>|persons to call for the Kazi.
1452|Adi 17.144
1453|TEXT 144
1454|TEXT
1455|dura ha-ite aila kaji matha noyaiya
1456|kajire vasaila prabhu sammana kariya
1457|SYNONYMS
1458|dura ha-ite-from a distant place; aila-came; kaji-the Kazi;
>|matha-head; noyaiya-bowed down; kajire-unto the Kazi;
>|vasaila-gave a seat; prabhu-the Lord; sammana-respect;
>|kariya-offering.
1459|TRANSLATION
1460|When the Kazi came, his head bowed down, the Lord gave him
>|proper respect and a seat.
1461|PURPORT
1462|Some of the men in Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's civil
>|disobedience movement were agitated because they could not
>|control their minds. But the Lord was thoroughly peaceful,
>|sober and unagitated. Therefore when the Kazi came down to
>|see Him, the Lord offered him proper respect and a seat
>|because he was a respectable government officer. Thus the
>|Lord taught us by His personal behavior. In pushing on our
>|sankirtana movement of Krsna consciousness, we might have
>|to face difficult days, but we should always follow in the
>|footsteps of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and do the needful
>|according to the time and circumstances.
1463|Adi 17.145
1464|TEXT 145
1465|TEXT
1466|prabhu balena,-ami tomara ailama abhyagata
1467|ami dekhi' lukaila,-e-dharma kemata
1468|SYNONYMS
1469|prabhu balena-the Lord said; ami-I; tomara-your; ailama-
>|have come; abhyagata-guest; ami-Me; dekhi'-seeing; lukaila-
>|you disappeared; e-dharma kemata-what kind of etiquette is
>|this.
1470|TRANSLATION
1471|In a friendly way, the Lord said, "Sir, I have come to your
>|house as your guest, but upon seeing Me you hid yourself in
>|your room. What kind of etiquette is this?"
1472|Adi 17.146
1473|TEXT 146
1474|TEXT
1475|kaji kahe-tumi aisa kruddha ha-iya
1476|toma santa karaite rahinu lukaiya
1477|SYNONYMS
1478|kaji kahe-the Kazi replied; tumi-You; aisa-have come;
>|kruddha-angry; ha-iya-being; toma-You; santa-pacified;
>|karaite-to make; rahinu-I remained; lukaiya-hiding out of
>|sight.
1479|TRANSLATION
1480|The Kazi replied, "You have come to my house in a very
>|angry mood. To pacify You, I did not come before You
>|immediately but kept myself hidden.
1481|Adi 17.147
1482|TEXT 147
1483|TEXT
1484|ebe tumi santa haile, asi, mililan
1485|bhagya mora,-toma hena atithi pailan
1486|SYNONYMS
1487|ebe-now; tumi-You; santa-pacified; haile-have become; asi'-
>|coming; mililan-I have met (You); bhagya mora-it is my
>|great fortune; toma-You; hena-like; atithi-guest; pailan-I
>|have received.
1488|TRANSLATION
1489|"Now that You have become pacified, I have come to You. It
>|is my good fortune to receive a guest like Your Honor.
1490|Adi 17.148
1491|TEXT 148
1492|TEXT
1493|grama-sambandhe 'cakravarti' haya mora caca
1494|deha-sambandhe haite haya grama-sambandha sanca
1495|SYNONYMS
1496|grama-sambandhe-in our neighborhood relationship;
>|cakravarti-Your grandfather Nilambara Cakravarti; haya-
>|becomes; mora-my; caca-uncle; deha-sambandhe-in a bodily
>|relationship; haite-than; haya-becomes; grama-sambandha-
>|neighborhood relationship; sanca-more powerful.
1497|TRANSLATION
1498|"In our village relationship, Nilambara Cakravarti Thakura
>|was my uncle. Such a relationship is stronger than a bodily
>|relationship.
1499|PURPORT
1500|In India, even in the interior villages, all the Hindu and
>|Muslim communities used to live very peacefully by
>|establishing a relationship between them. The young men
>|called the elderly members of the village by the name caca
>|or kaka, "uncle," and men of the same age called each other
>|dada, "brother." The relationship was very friendly. There
>|were even invitations from Muslim houses to Hindu houses
>|and from Hindu houses to Muslim houses. Both the Hindus and
>|the Muslims accepted the invitations to go to one another's
>|houses to attend ceremonial functions. Even until fifty or
>|sixty years ago, the relationship between Hindus and
>|Muslims was very friendly, and there were no disturbances.
>|We do not find any Hindu-Muslim riots in the history of
>|India, even during the days of the Muslims' rule over the
>|country. Conflict between Hindus and Muslims was created by
>|polluted politicians, especially foreign rulers, and thus
>|the situation gradually became so degraded that India was
>|divided into Hindustan and Pakistan. Fortunately, the
>|remedy to unite not only the Hindus and Muslims but all
>|communities and all nations can still be implemented by the
>|Hare Krsna movement on the strong basic platform of love of
>|Godhead.
1501|Adi 17.149
1502|TEXT 149
1503|TEXT
1504|nilambara cakravarti haya tomara nana
1505|se-sambandhe hao tumi amara bhagina
1506|SYNONYMS
1507|nilambara cakravarti-Nilambara Cakravarti; haya-
>|becomes; tomara-Your; nana-maternal grandfather; se-
>|sambandhe-by such a relationship; hao-become; tumi-You;
>|amara-my; bhagina-nephew (the son of my sister).
1508|TRANSLATION
1509|"Nilambara Cakravarti is Your maternal grandfather, and by
>|this relationship You are thus my nephew.
1510|Adi 17.150
1511|TEXT 150
1512|TEXT
1513|bhaginara krodha mama avasya sahaya
1514|matulera aparadha bhagina na laya
1515|SYNONYMS
1516|bhaginara-of the nephew; krodha-anger; mama-maternal uncle;
>|avasya-certainly; sahaya-tolerates; matulera-of the
>|maternal uncle; aparadha-offense; bhagina-the nephew; na-
>|does not; laya-accept.
1517|TRANSLATION
1518|"When a nephew is very angry, his maternal uncle is
>|tolerant, and when the maternal uncle commits an offense,
>|the nephew does not take it very seriously."
1519|Adi 17.151
1520|TEXT 151
1521|TEXT
1522|ei mata dunhara katha haya thare-thore
1523|bhitarera artha keha bujhite na pare
1524|SYNONYMS
1525|ei mata-in this way; dunhara-of both of them; katha-
>|conversation; haya-took place; thare-thore-with different
>|indications; bhitarera-inner; artha-meaning; keha-anyone;
>|bujhite-to understand; na pare-is not able.
1526|TRANSLATION
1527|In this way the Kazi and the Lord talked with each other
>|with various indications, but no outsider could understand
>|the inner meaning of their conversation.
1528|Adi 17.152
1529|TEXT 152
1530|TEXT
1531|prabhu kahe,-prasna lagi' ailama tomara sthane
1532|kaji kahe,-ajna kara, ye tomara mane
1533|SYNONYMS
1534|prabhu kahe-the Lord said; prasna lagi'-just to inquire
>|from you; ailama-I have come; tomara sthane-at your place;
>|kaji kahe-the Kazi replied; ajna kara-just order me; ye-
>|whatever; tomara mane-(is) in Your mind.
1535|TRANSLATION
1536|The Lord said, "My dear uncle, I have come to your home
>|just to ask you some questions."
1537|"Yes," the Kazi replied, "You are welcome. Just tell me
>|what is in Your mind."
1538|Adi 17.153
1539|TEXT 153
1540|TEXT
1541|prabhu kahe,-go-dugdha khao, gabhi tomara mata
1542|vrsa anna upajaya, tate tenho pita
1543|SYNONYMS
1544|prabhu kahe-the Lord said; go-dugdha khao-you drink cows'
>|milk; gabhi-the cow (is); tomara-your; mata-mother; vrsa-
>|the bull; anna-grains; upajaya-produces; tate-therefore;
>|tenho-he; pita-(is) your father.
1545|TRANSLATION
1546|The Lord said, "You drink cows' milk; therefore the cow is
>|your mother. And the bull produces grains for your
>|maintenance; therefore he is your father.
1547|Adi 17.154
1548|TEXT 154
1549|TEXT
1550|pita-mata mari' khao-eba kon dharma
1551|kon bale kara tumi e-mata vikarma
1552|SYNONYMS
1553|pita-mata-father and mother; mari'-killing; khao-you eat;
>|eba-this; kon-what kind of; dharma-religion; kon bale-on
>|what strength; kara-do; tumi-you; e-mata-such; vikarma-
>|sinful activities.
1554|TRANSLATION
1555|"Since the bull and cow are your father and mother, how can
>|you kill and eat them? What kind of religious principle is
>|this? On what strength are you so daring that you commit
>|such sinful activities?"
1556|PURPORT
1557|Everyone can understand that we drink the milk of cows and
>|take the help of bulls in producing agricultural products.
>|Therefore, since our real father gives us food grains and
>|our mother gives us milk with which to live, the cow and
>|bull are considered our father and mother. According to
>|Vedic civilization, there are seven mothers, of which the
>|cow is one. Therefore Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu challenged
>|the Muslim Kazi, "What kind of religious principle do you
>|follow by killing your father and mother to eat them?" In
>|any civilized human society, no one would dare kill his
>|father and mother for the purpose of eating them. Therefore
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu challenged the system of Muslim
>|religion as patricide and matricide. In the Christian
>|religion also, a principal commandment is "Thou shalt not
>|kill." Nevertheless, Christians violate this rule; they are
>|very expert in killing and in opening slaughterhouses. In
>|our Krsna consciousness movement, our first provision is
>|that no one should be allowed to eat any kind of flesh. It
>|does not matter whether it is cows' flesh or goats' flesh,
>|but we especially stress the prohibition against cows'
>|flesh because according to sastra the cow is our mother.
>|Thus the Muslims' cow-killing was challenged by Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
1558|Adi 17.155
1559|TEXT 155
1560|TEXT
1561|kaji kahe,-tomara yaiche veda-purana
1562|taiche amara sastra-ketava 'korana'
1563|SYNONYMS
1564|kaji kahe-the Kazi replied; tomara-Your; yaiche-as much as;
>|veda-purana-the Vedas and Puranas; taiche-similarly; amara-
>|our; sastra-scripture; ketava-the holy book; korana-the
>|Koran.
1565|TRANSLATION
1566|The Kazi replied, "As You have Your scriptures called the
>|Vedas and Puranas, we have our scripture, known as the holy
>|Koran.
1567|PURPORT
1568|Chand Kazi agreed to talk with Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu on
>|the strength of the scriptures. According to the Vedic
>|scripture, if one can support his position by quoting from
>|the Vedas, his argument is perfect. Similarly, when the
>|Muslims support their position with quotations from the
>|Koran, their arguments are also authorized. When Lord Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu raised the question of the Muslims' cow-
>|killing and bull-killing, Chand Kazi came to the standard
>|of understanding from his scriptures.
1569|Adi 17.156
1570|TEXT 156
1571|TEXT
1572|sei sastre kahe,-pravrtti-nivrtti-marga-bheda
1573|nivrtti-marge jiva-matra-vadhera nisedha
1574|SYNONYMS
1575|sei sastre-in the scripture (the Koran); kahe-it is ordered;
>| pravrtti-of attachment; nivrtti-of detachment; marga-ways;
>|bheda-difference; nivrtti-of detachment; marge-on the path;
>|jiva-matra-of any living entity; vadhera-of killing;
>|nisedha-prohibition.
1576|TRANSLATION
1577|"According to the Koran, there are two ways of advancement-
>|through increasing the propensity to enjoy, and through
>|decreasing the propensity to enjoy. On the path of
>|decreasing attachment [nivrtti-marga], the killing of
>|animals is prohibited.
1578|Adi 17.157
1579|TEXT 157
1580|TEXT
1581|pravrtti-marge go-vadha karite vidhi haya
1582|sastra-ajnaya vadha kaile nahi papa-bhaya
1583|SYNONYMS
1584|pravrtti-marge-on the path of attachment; go-vadha-the
>|killing of cows; karite-to execute; vidhi-regulative
>|principles; haya-there are; sastra-ajnaya-on the order of
>|the scripture; vadha-killing; kaile-if one commits; nahi-
>|there is no; papa-bhaya-fear of sinful activities.
1585|TRANSLATION
1586|"On the path of material activities, there is regulation
>|for killing cows. If such killing is done under the
>|guidance of scripture, there is no sin."
1587|PURPORT
1588|The word sastra is derived from the dhatu, or verbal root,
>|sas. Sas-dhatu pertains to controlling or ruling. A
>|government's ruling through force or weapons is called
>|sastra. Thus whenever there is ruling, either by weapons or
>|by injunctions, the sas-dhatu is the basic principle.
>|Between sastra (ruling through weapons) and sastra (ruling
>|through the injunctions of the scriptures), the better is
>|sastra. Our Vedic scriptures are not ordinary lawbooks of
>|human common sense; they are the statements of factually
>|liberated persons unaffected by the imperfectness of the
>|senses.
1589|Sastra must be correct always, not sometimes correct and
>|sometimes incorrect. In the Vedic scriptures, the cow is
>|described as a mother. Therefore she is a mother for all
>|time; it is not, as some rascals say, that in the Vedic age
>|she was a mother but she is not in this age. If sastra is
>|an authority, the cow is a mother always; she was a mother
>|in the Vedic age, and she is a mother in this age also.
1590|If one acts according to the injunctions of sastra, he is
>|freed from the reactions of sinful activity. For example,
>|the propensities for eating flesh, drinking wine and
>|enjoying sex are all natural to the conditioned soul.
>|The path of such enjoyment is called pravrtti-marga. The
>|sastra says, pravrttir esa bhutanam nivrttis tu maha-phala:
>| one should not be carried away by the propensities of
>|defective conditioned life; one should be guided by the
>|principles of the sastras. A child's propensity is to play
>|all day long, but it is the injunction of the sastras that
>|the parents should take care to educate him. The sastras
>|are there just to guide the activities of human society.
>|But because people do not refer to the instructions of
>|sastras, which are free from defects and imperfections,
>|they are therefore misguided by so-called educated teachers
>|and leaders who are full of the deficiencies of conditioned
>|life.
1591|Adi 17.158
1592|TEXT 158
1593|TEXT
1594|tomara vedete ache go-vadhera vani
1595|ataeva go-vadha kare bada bada muni
1596|SYNONYMS
1597|tomara vedete-in Your Vedic literatures; ache-there is; go-
>|vadhera-for cow-killing; vani-injunction; ataeva-therefore;
>|go-vadha-cow-killing; kare-does; bada bada-very, very great;
>| muni-sages.
1598|TRANSLATION
1599|As a learned scholar, the Kazi challenged Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, "In Your Vedic scriptures there is an
>|injunction for killing a cow. On the strength of this
>|injunction, great sages performed sacrifices involving cow-
>|killing."
1600|Adi 17.159
1601|TEXT 159
1602|TEXT
1603|prabhu kahe,-vede kahe go-vadha nisedha
1604|ataeva hindu-matra na kare go-vadha
1605|SYNONYMS
1606|prabhu kahe-the Lord replied; vede-in the Vedas; kahe-is
>|enjoined; go-vadha-cow-killing; nisedha-prohibition; ataeva-
>|therefore; hindu-Hindu; matra-any; na-does not; kare-
>|execute; go-vadha-cow-killing.
1607|TRANSLATION
1608|Refuting the Kazi's statement, the Lord immediately replied,
>| "The Vedas clearly enjoin that cows should not be killed.
>|Therefore every Hindu, whoever he may be, avoids indulging
>|in cow-killing.
1609|PURPORT
1610|In the Vedic scriptures there are concessions for meat-
>|eaters. It is said that if one wants to eat meat, he should
>|kill a goat before the goddess Kali and then eat its meat.
>|Meat-eaters are not allowed to purchase meat or flesh from
>|a market or slaughterhouse. There are no sanctions for
>|maintaining regular slaughterhouses to satisfy the tongues
>|of meat-eaters. As far as cow-killing is concerned, it is
>|completely forbidden. Since the cow is considered a mother,
>|how could the Vedas allow cow-killing? Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu pointed out that the Kazi's statement was faulty.
>| In the Bhagavad-gita (18.44) there is a clear injunction
>|that cows should be protected: krsi-goraksya-vanijyam
>|vaisya-karma svabhava-jam. "The duty of vaisyas is to
>|produce agricultural products, trade and give protection to
>|cows." Therefore it is a false statement that the Vedic
>|scriptures contain injunctions permitting cow-killing.
1611|Adi 17.160
1612|TEXT 160
1613|TEXT
1614|jiyaite pare yadi, tabe mare prani
1615|veda-purane ache hena ajna-vani
1616|SYNONYMS
1617|jiyaite-to rejuvenate; pare-one is able; yadi-if; tabe-then;
>| mare-can kill; prani-living being; veda-purane-in the
>|Vedas and Puranas; ache-there are; hena-such; ajna-vani-
>|orders and injunctions.
1618|TRANSLATION
1619|"In the Vedas and Puranas there are injunctions declaring
>|that if one can revive a living being, one can kill it for
>|experimental purposes.
1620|Adi 17.161
1621|TEXT 161
1622|TEXT
1623|ataeva jarad-gava mare muni-gana
1624|veda-mantre siddha kare tahara jivana
1625|SYNONYMS
1626|ataeva-therefore; jarad-gava-old cows; mare-killed; muni-
>|gana-sages; veda-mantre-by the power of Vedic hymns; siddha-
>|rejuvenated; kare-makes; tahara-his; jivana-life.
1627|TRANSLATION
1628|"Therefore the great sages sometimes killed old cows, and
>|by chanting Vedic hymns they brought them back to
>|life for perfection.
1629|Adi 17.162
1630|TEXT 162
1631|TEXT
1632|jarad-gava hana yuva haya ara-vara
1633|tate tara vadha nahe, haya upakara
1634|SYNONYMS
1635|jarad-gava-old, invalid cows; hana-becoming; yuva-young;
>|haya-become; ara-vara-again; tate-in that action; tara-his;
>|vadha-killing; nahe-is not; haya-there is; upakara-benefit.
1636|TRANSLATION
1637|"The killing and rejuvenation of such old and invalid cows
>|was not truly killing but an act of great benefit.
1638|Adi 17.163
1639|TEXT 163
1640|TEXT
1641|kali-kale taiche sakti nahika brahmane
1642|ataeva go-vadha keha na kare ekhane
1643|SYNONYMS
1644|kali-kale-in the Age of Kali; taiche-such; sakti-power;
>|nahika-there is none; brahmane-in the brahmanas; ataeva-
>|therefore; go-vadha-killing of cows; keha-anyone; na-does
>|not; kare-execute; ekhane-at the present.
1645|TRANSLATION
1646|"Formerly there were powerful brahmanas who could make such
>|experiments using Vedic hymns, but now, because of the Kali-
>|yuga, brahmanas are not so powerful. Therefore the killing
>|of cows and bulls for rejuvenation is forbidden.
1647|Adi 17.164
1648|TEXT 164
1649|TEXT
1650|asvamedham gavalambham
1651|sannyasam pala-paitrkam
1652|devarena sutotpattim
1653|kalau panca vivarjayet
1654|SYNONYMS
1655|asva-medham-a sacrifice offering a horse; gava-alambham-a
>|sacrifice of cows; sannyasam-the renounced order of life;
>|pala-paitrkam-an offering of oblations of flesh to the
>|forefathers; devarena-by a husband's brother; suta-utpattim-
>|begetting children; kalau-in the Age of Kali; panca-five;
>|vivarjayet-one must give up.
1656|TRANSLATION
1657|"'In this Age of Kali, five acts are forbidden: the
>|offering of a horse in sacrifice, the offering of a cow in
>|sacrifice, the acceptance of the order of sannyasa, the
>|offering of oblations of flesh to the forefathers, and a
>|man's begetting children in his brother's wife.'
1658|PURPORT
1659|This is a quotation from the Brahma-vaivarta Purana (Krsna-
>|janma-khanda 185.180).
1660|Adi 17.165
1661|TEXT 165
1662|TEXT
1663|tomara jiyaite nara,-vadha-matra sara
1664|naraka ha-ite tomara nahika nistara
1665|SYNONYMS
1666|tomara-you Muslims; jiyaite-bring to life; nara-cannot;
>|vadha-matra-killing only; sara-the essence; naraka ha-ite-
>|from hell; tomara-your; nahika-there is not; nistara-
>|deliverance.
1667|TRANSLATION
1668|"Since you Muslims cannot bring killed cows back to life,
>| you are responsible for killing them. Therefore you are
>|going to hell; there is no way for your deliverance.
1669|Adi 17.166
1670|TEXT 166
1671|TEXT
1672|go-ange yata loma, tata sahasra vatsara
1673|go-vadhi raurava-madhye pace nirantara
1674|SYNONYMS
1675|go-ange-on the body of the cow; yata-as many; loma-hairs;
>|tata-so many; sahasra-a thousand; vatsara-years; go-vadhi-
>|the killer of a cow; raurava-madhye-in a hellish condition
>|of life; pace-decomposes; nirantara-always.
1676|TRANSLATION
1677|"Cow-killers are condemned to rot in hellish life for as
>|many thousands of years as there are hairs on the body of
>|the cow.
1678|Adi 17.167
1679|TEXT 167
1680|TEXT
1681|toma-sabara sastra-karta-seha bhranta haila
1682|na jani' sastrera marma aiche ajna dila
1683|SYNONYMS
1684|toma-sabara-of all of you; sastra-karta-compilers of
>|scripture; seha-they also; bhranta-mistaken; haila-became;
>|na jani'-without knowing; sastrera marma-the essence of
>|scriptures; aiche-such; ajna-order; dila-gave.
1685|TRANSLATION
1686|"There are many mistakes and illusions in your scriptures.
>|Their compilers, not knowing the essence of knowledge, gave
>|orders that were against reason and argument."
1687|Adi 17.168
1688|TEXT 168
1689|TEXT
1690|suni' stabdha haila kaji, nahi sphure vani
1691|vicariya kahe kaji parabhava mani'
1692|SYNONYMS
1693|suni'-by hearing; stabdha-stunned; haila-became; kaji-the
>|Kazi; nahi-does not; sphure-utter; vani-words; vicariya-
>|after due consideration; kahe-said; kaji-the Kazi;
>|parabhava-defeat; mani'-accepting.
1694|TRANSLATION
1695|After hearing these statements by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu,
>|the Kazi, his arguments stunned, could not put forward any
>|more words. Thus, after due consideration, the Kazi
>|accepted defeat and spoke as follows.
1696|PURPORT
1697|In our practical preaching work we meet many Christians who
>|talk about statements of the Bible. When we question
>|whether God is limited or unlimited, Christian priests say
>|that God is unlimited. But when we question why the
>|unlimited God should have only one son and not unlimited
>|sons, they are unable to answer. Similarly, from a
>|scientific point of view, the answers of the Old Testament,
>|New Testament and Koran to many questions have changed. But
>|a sastra cannot change at a person's whim. All sastras must
>|be free from the four defects of human nature. The
>|statements of sastras must be correct for all time.
1698|Adi 17.169
1699|TEXT 169
1700|TEXT
1701|tumi ye kahile, pandita, sei satya haya
1702|adhunika amara sastra, vicara-saha naya
1703|SYNONYMS
1704|tumi-You; ye-whatever; kahile-have said; pandita-O Nimai
>|Pandita; sei-that; satya-truth; haya-is certainly; adhunika-
>|of modern days; amara-our; sastra-scripture; vicara-logic;
>|saha-with; naya-they are not.
1705|TRANSLATION
1706|"My dear Nimai Pandita, what You have said is all true. Our
>|scriptures have developed only recently, and they are
>|certainly not logical and philosophical.
1707|PURPORT
1708|The sastras of the yavanas, or meat-eaters, are not eternal
>|scriptures. They have been fashioned recently, and
>|sometimes they contradict one another. The scriptures of
>|the yavanas are three: the Old Testament, the New Testament
>|and the Koran. Their compilation has a history; they are
>|not eternal like the Vedic knowledge. Therefore although
>|they have their arguments and reasonings, they are not very
>|sound and transcendental. As such, modern people advanced
>|in science and philosophy deem these scriptures
>|unacceptable.
1709|Sometimes Christian priests come to us inquiring, "Why are
>|our followers neglecting our scriptures and accepting yours?
>|" But when we ask them, "Your Bible says, 'Do not kill.'
>|Why then are you killing so many animals daily?" they
>|cannot answer. Some of them imperfectly answer that the
>|animals have no souls. But then we ask them, "How do you
>|know that animals have no souls? Animals and children are
>|of the same nature. Does this mean that the children of
>|human society also have no souls?" According to the Vedic
>|scriptures, within the body is the owner of the body, the
>|soul. In the Bhagavad-gita (2.13) it is said:
1710|dehino 'smin yatha dehe kaumaram yauvanam jara
1711|tatha dehantara -praptir dhiras tatra na muhyati
1712|"As the embodied soul continuously passes, in this body,
>|from boyhood to youth to old age, the soul similarly passes
>|into another body at death. The self-realized soul is not
>|bewildered by such a change."
1713|Because the soul is within the body, the body changes
>|through so many forms. There is a soul within the body of
>|every living creature, whether animal, tree, bird or human
>|being, and the soul is transmigrating from one type of body
>|to another. When the scriptures of the yavanas-namely the
>|Old Testament, New Testament and Koran-cannot properly
>|answer inquisitive followers, naturally those advanced in
>|scientific knowledge and philosophy lose faith in such
>|scriptures. The Kazi admitted this while talking with Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu. The Kazi was a very intelligent person.
>| He had full knowledge of his position, as stated in the
>|following verse.
1714|Adi 17.170
1715|TEXT 170
1716|TEXT
1717|kalpita amara sastra,-ami saba jani
1718|jati-anurodhe tabu sei sastra mani
1719|SYNONYMS
1720|kalpita-imagined; amara-our; sastra-scripture; ami-I; saba-
>|everything; jani-know; jati-by community; anurodhe-being
>|obliged; tabu-still; sei-that; sastra-scripture; mani-I
>|accept.
1721|TRANSLATION
1722|"I know that our scriptures are full of imagination and
>|mistaken ideas, yet because I am a Muslim I accept them for
>|the sake of my community, despite their insufficient
>|support.
1723|Adi 17.171
1724|TEXT 171
1725|TEXT
1726|sahaje yavana-sastre adrdha vicara
1727|hasi' tahe mahaprabhu puchena ara-vara
1728|SYNONYMS
1729|sahaje-naturally; yavana-sastre-in the scriptures of the
>|meat-eaters; adrdha-unsound; vicara-judgment; hasi'-smiling;
>| tahe-from him; mahaprabhu-Caitanya Mahaprabhu; puchena-
>|inquired; ara-vara-again.
1730|TRANSLATION
1731|"The reasoning and arguments in the scriptures of the meat-
>|eaters are not very sound," the Kazi concluded. Upon
>|hearing this statement, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu smiled and
>|inquired from him as follows.
1732|Adi 17.172
1733|TEXT 172
1734|TEXT
1735|ara eka prasna kari, suna, tumi mama
1736|yathartha kahibe, chale na vanchibe ama'
1737|SYNONYMS
1738|ara eka-one more; prasna-inquiry; kari-am putting; suna-
>|hear; tumi-you; mama-maternal uncle; yatha-artha-as it is
>|true; kahibe-you should speak; chale-by tricks; na vanchibe-
>|you should not cheat; ama'-Me.
1739|TRANSLATION
1740|"My dear maternal uncle, I wish to ask you another question.
>| Please tell Me the truth. Do not try to cheat Me with
>|tricks.
1741|Adi 17.173
1742|TEXT 173
1743|TEXT
1744|tomara nagare haya sada sankirtana
1745|vadya-gita-kolahala, sangita, nartana
1746|SYNONYMS
1747|tomara nagare-in your city; haya-there is; sada-always;
>|sankirtana-chanting of the holy name of the Lord; vadya-
>|musical sounds; gita-song; kolahala-tumultuous roaring;
>|sangita-singing; nartana-dancing.
1748|TRANSLATION
1749|"In your city there is always congregational chanting of
>|the holy name. A tumultuous uproar of music, singing and
>|dancing is always going on.
1750|Adi 17.174
1751|TEXT 174
1752|TEXT
1753|tumi kaji-hindu-dharma-virodhe adhikari
1754|ebe ye na kara mana bujhite na pari
1755|SYNONYMS
1756|tumi-you; kaji-the magistrate; hindu-dharma-the religious
>|principles of the Hindus; virodhe-in opposing; adhikari-
>|have the right; ebe-now; ye-that; na kara mana-you do not
>|forbid; bujhite-to understand; na pari-I am not able.
1757|TRANSLATION
1758|"As a Muslim magistrate, you have the right to oppose the
>|performance of Hindu ceremonies, but now you do not forbid
>|them. I cannot understand the reason why."
1759|Adi 17.175
1760|TEXT 175
1761|TEXT
1762|kaji bale-sabhe tomaya bale 'gaurahari'
1763|sei name ami tomaya sambodhana kari
1764|SYNONYMS
1765|kaji bale-the Kazi said; sabhe-all; tomaya-You; bale-
>|address; gaurahari-by the name Gaurahari; sei name-by that
>|name; ami-I; tomaya-You; sambodhana-address; kari-do.
1766|TRANSLATION
1767|The Kazi said, "Everyone calls You Gaurahari. Please let me
>|address You by that name.
1768|Adi 17.176
1769|TEXT 176
1770|TEXT
1771|suna, gaurahari, ei prasnera karana
1772|nibhrta hao yadi, tabe kari nivedana
1773|SYNONYMS
1774|suna-kindly hear; gaurahari-O Gaurahari; ei prasnera-of
>|this question; karana-reason; nibhrta-solitary; hao-You
>|become; yadi-if; tabe-then; kari-I shall make; nivedana-
>|submission.
1775|TRANSLATION
1776|"Kindly listen, O Gaurahari! If You come to a private place,
>| I shall then explain the reason."
1777|Adi 17.177
1778|TEXT 177
1779|TEXT
1780|prabhu bale,-e loka amara antaranga haya
1781|sphuta kari' kaha tumi, na kariha bhaya
1782|SYNONYMS
1783|prabhu bale-the Lord said; e loka-all these men; amara-My;
>|antaranga-confidential associates; haya-are; sphuta kari'-
>|making it clear; kaha-speak; tumi-you; na-do not; kariha
>|bhaya-be afraid.
1784|TRANSLATION
1785|The Lord replied, "All these men are My confidential
>|associates. You may speak frankly. There is no reason to be
>|afraid of them."
1786|Adi 17.178–179
1787|TEXTS 178–179
1788|TEXT
1789|kaji kahe,-yabe ami hindura ghare giya
1790|kirtana karilun mana mrdanga bhangiya
1791|sei ratre eka simha maha-bhayankara
1792|nara-deha, simha-mukha, garjaye vistara
1793|SYNONYMS
1794|kaji kahe-the Kazi replied; yabe-when; ami-I; hindura-of a
>|Hindu; ghare-in the house; giya-going there; kirtana-
>|chanting of the holy name; karilun-made; mana-prohibition;
>|mrdanga-the drum; bhangiya-breaking; sei ratre-on that
>|night; eka-one; simha-lion; maha-bhayan-kara-very fearful;
>|nara-deha-having a body like a human being's; simha-mukha-
>|having a face like a lion's; garjaye-was roaring; vistara-
>|very loudly.
1795|TRANSLATION
1796|The Kazi said, "When I went to the Hindu's house, broke the
>|drum and forbade the performance of congregational chanting,
>| in my dreams that very night I saw a greatly fearful lion,
>|roaring very loudly, His body like a human being's and His
>|face like a lion's.
1797|Adi 17.180
1798|TEXT 180
1799|TEXT
1800|sayane amara upara lapha diya cadi'
1801|atta atta hase, kare danta-kadamadi
1802|SYNONYMS
1803|sayane-in a sleeping condition; amara-me; upara-upon; lapha
>|diya-jumping; cadi'-mounting; atta atta-rough and hard;
>|hase-laughs; kare-does; danta-teeth; kadamadi-gnashing.
1804|TRANSLATION
1805|"While I was asleep, the lion jumped on my chest, laughing
>|fiercely and gnashing His teeth.
1806|Adi 17.181
1807|TEXT 181
1808|TEXT
1809|mora buke nakha diya ghora-svare bale
1810|phadimu tomara buka mrdanga badale
1811|SYNONYMS
1812|mora-my; buke-on the chest; nakha-nails; diya-placing;
>|ghora-roaring; svare-in a voice; bale-says; phadimu-I shall
>|bifurcate; tomara-your; buka-chest; mrdanga-for the drum;
>|badale-in exchange.
1813|TRANSLATION
1814|"Placing its nails on my chest, the lion said in a grave
>|voice, 'I shall immediately bifurcate your chest as you
>|broke the mrdanga drum!
1815|Adi 17.182
1816|TEXT 182
1817|TEXT
1818|mora kirtana mana karis, karimu tora ksaya
1819|ankhi mudi' kanpi ami pana bada bhaya
1820|SYNONYMS
1821|mora-My; kirtana-congregational chanting; mana karis-you
>|are forbidding; karimu-I shall do; tora-your; ksaya-
>|destruction; ankhi-eyes; mudi'-closing; kanpi-I was
>|trembling; ami-I; pana-getting; bada-very great; bhaya-fear.
1822|TRANSLATION
1823|"'You have forbidden the performance of My congregational
>|chanting. Therefore I must destroy you!' Being very much
>|afraid of Him, I closed my eyes and trembled.
1824|Adi 17.183
1825|TEXT 183
1826|TEXT
1827|bhita dekhi' simha bale ha-iya sadaya
1828|tore siksa dite kailu tora parajaya
1829|SYNONYMS
1830|bhita dekhi'-seeing me so afraid; simha-the lion; bale-says;
>| ha-iya-becoming; sa-daya-merciful; tore-unto you; siksa-
>|lesson; dite-to give; kailu-I have done; tora-your;
>|parajaya-defeat.
1831|TRANSLATION
1832|"Seeing me so afraid, the lion said, 'I have defeated you
>|just to teach you a lesson, but I must be merciful to you.
1833|Adi 17.184
1834|TEXT 184
1835|TEXT
1836|se dina bahuta nahi kaili utpata
1837|teni ksama kari' na karinu pranaghata
1838|SYNONYMS
1839|se dina-on that day; bahuta-very much; nahi-not; kaili-you
>|did; utpata-disturbance; teni-therefore; ksama kari'-
>|forgiving; na karinu-I did not execute; prana-aghata-the
>|taking of your life.
1840|TRANSLATION
1841|"'On that day you did not create a very great disturbance.
>|Therefore I have excused you and not taken your life.
1842|Adi 17.185
1843|TEXT 185
1844|TEXT
1845|aiche yadi punah kara, tabe na sahimu
1846|savamse tomare mari yavana nasimu
1847|SYNONYMS
1848|aiche-similarly; yadi-if; punah-again; kara-you do; tabe-
>|then; na sahimu-I shall not tolerate; sa-vamse-along with
>|your family; tomare-you; mari-killing; yavana-the meat-
>|eaters; nasimu-I shall vanquish.
1849|TRANSLATION
1850|"'But if you perform such activities again, I shall not be
>|tolerant. At that time I shall kill you, your entire family
>|and all the meat-eaters.'
1851|Adi 17.186
1852|TEXT 186
1853|TEXT
1854|eta kahi' simha gela, amara haila bhaya
1855|ei dekha, nakha-cihna amora hrdaya
1856|SYNONYMS
1857|eta-thus; kahi'-saying; simha-the lion; gela-returned;
>|amara-my; haila-there was; bhaya-fear; ei dekha-just see
>|this; nakha-cihna-the nail marks; amora hrdaya-on my heart.
1858|TRANSLATION
1859|"After saying this, the lion left, but I was very much
>|afraid of Him. Just see the marks of His nails on my heart!"
1860|Adi 17.187
1861|TEXT 187
1862|TEXT
1863|eta bali' kaji nija-buka dekhaila
1864|suni' dekhi' sarva-loka ascarya manila
1865|SYNONYMS
1866|eta bali'-saying this; kaji-the Kazi; nija-buka-his chest;
>|dekhaila-showed; suni'-hearing; dekhi'-seeing; sarva-loka-
>|everyone; ascarya-wonderful incident; manila-accepted.
1867|TRANSLATION
1868|After this description, the Kazi showed his chest. Having
>|heard him and seen the marks, all the people there accepted
>|the wonderful incident.
1869|Adi 17.188
1870|TEXT 188
1871|TEXT
1872|kaji kahe,-iha ami kare na kahila
1873|sei dina amara eka piyada aila
1874|SYNONYMS
1875|kaji kahe-the Kazi said; iha-this; ami-I; kare-to others;
>|na kahila-did not tell; sei dina-on that day; amara-my; eka-
>|one; piyada-orderly; aila-came to see me.
1876|TRANSLATION
1877|The Kazi continued, "I did not speak to anyone about this
>|incident, but on that very day one of my orderlies came to
>|see me.
1878|Adi 17.189
1879|TEXT 189
1880|TEXT
1881|asi' kahe,-gelun muni kirtana nisedhite
1882|agni ulka mora mukhe lage acambite
1883|SYNONYMS
1884|asi'-coming to me; kahe-he said; gelun-went; muni-I;
>|kirtana-congregational chanting; nisedhite-to stop; agni
>|ulka-flames of fire; mora-my; mukhe-in the face; lage-come
>|in contact; acambite-all of a sudden.
1885|TRANSLATION
1886|"After coming to me, the orderly said, 'When I went to stop
>|the congregational chanting, suddenly flames struck my face.
1887|Adi 17.190
1888|TEXT 190
1889|TEXT
1890|pudila sakala dadi, mukhe haila vrana
1891|yei peyada yaya, tara ei vivarana
1892|SYNONYMS
1893|pudila-burned; sakala-all; dadi-beard; mukhe-on the face;
>|haila-there was; vrana-blisters; yei-any; peyada-orderly;
>|yaya-goes; tara-his; ei-this; vivarana-description.
1894|TRANSLATION
1895|"'My beard was burned, and there were blisters on my
>|cheeks.' Every orderly who went gave the same description.
1896|Adi 17.191
1897|TEXT 191
1898|TEXT
1899|taha dekhi' rahinu muni maha-bhaya pana
1900|kirtana na varjiha, ghare rahon ta' vasiya
1901|SYNONYMS
1902|taha dekhi'-seeing that; rahinu-remained; muni-I; maha-
>|bhaya-great fear; pana-getting; kirtana-the congregational
>|chanting; na-not; varjiha-stop; ghare-at home; rahon-remain;
>| ta'-certainly; vasiya-sitting.
1903|TRANSLATION
1904|"After seeing this, I was very much afraid. I asked them
>|not to stop the congregational chanting but to go sit down
>|at home.
1905|Adi 17.192
1906|TEXT 192
1907|TEXT
1908|tabe ta' nagare ha-ibe svacchande kirtana
1909|suni' saba mleccha asi' kaila nivedana
1910|SYNONYMS
1911|tabe ta'-thereafter; nagare-in the city; ha-ibe-there would
>|be; svacchande-without disturbance or anxiety; kirtana-
>|congregational chanting; suni',-hearing this; saba-all;
>|mleccha-meat-eaters; asi'-coming; kaila-submitted; nivedana-
>|petition.
1912|TRANSLATION
1913|"Then all the meat-eaters, hearing that there would be
>|unrestricted congregational chanting in the city, came to
>|submit a petition.
1914|Adi 17.193
1915|TEXT 193
1916|TEXT
1917|nagare hindura dharma badila apara
1918|'hari' 'hari' dhvani ba-i nahi suni ara
1919|SYNONYMS
1920|nagare-in the city; hindura-of the Hindus; dharma-religion;
>|badila-has increased; apara-unlimitedly; hari hari-of the
>|Lord's name, Hari, Hari; dhvani-the vibration; ba-i-except;
>|nahi-do not; suni-we hear; ara-anything else.
1921|TRANSLATION
1922|"'The religion of the Hindus has increased unlimitedly.
>|There are always vibrations of "Hari! Hari!" We do not hear
>|anything but this.'
1923|Adi 17.194
1924|TEXT 194
1925|TEXT
1926|ara mleccha kahe,-hindu 'krsna krsna' bali'
1927|hase, kande, nace, gaya, gadi yaya dhuli
1928|SYNONYMS
1929|ara-another; mleccha-meat-eater; kahe-said; hindu-Hindus;
>|krsna krsna bali'-saying "Krsna, Krsna"; hase-laugh; kande-
>|cry; nace-dance; gaya-chant; gadi yaya dhuli-roll in the
>|dust.
1930|TRANSLATION
1931|"One meat-eater said, 'The Hindus say, "Krsna, Krsna," and
>|they laugh, cry, dance, chant and fall on the ground,
>|smearing their bodies with dirt.
1932|Adi 17.195
1933|TEXT 195
1934|TEXT
1935|'hari' 'hari' kari' hindu kare kolahala
1936|patasaha sunile tomara karibeka phala
1937|SYNONYMS
1938|hari hari kari'-saying "Hari, Hari"; hindu-the Hindus; kare-
>|make; kolahala-tumultuous sound; patasaha-the king; sunile-
>|if hearing; tomara-your; karibeka-will do; phala-punishment.
1939|TRANSLATION
1940|"'Vibrating "Hari, Hari," the Hindus make a tumultuous
>|sound. If the king [patasaha] hears it, certainly he will
>|punish you.'
1941|PURPORT
1942|Patasaha refers to the king. Nawab Hussain Shah, whose full
>|name was Ala Uddin Saiyad Husen Sa, was at that time (A.D.
>|1498–1521) the independent King of Bengal. Formerly he was
>|the servant of the cruel Nawab of the Habsi dynasty named
>|Mujahphara Khan, but somehow or other he assassinated his
>|master and became the King. After gaining the throne of
>|Bengal (technically called Masnada), he declared himself
>|Saiyad Husen Ala Uddin Seriph Mukka. There is a book called
>|Riyaja Us-salatina, whose author, Golam Husen, says that
>|Nawab Hussain Shah belonged to the family of Mukka Seriph.
>|To keep his family's glory, he took the name Seriph Mukka.
>|Generally, however, he is known as Nawab Hussain Shah.
>|After his death, his eldest son, Nasaratsa, became King of
>|Bengal (A.D. 1521 –1533). This King also was very cruel. He
>|committed many atrocities against the Vaisnavas. As a
>|result of his sinful activities, one of his servants from
>|the Khoja group killed him while he was praying in the
>|mosque.
1943|Adi 17.196
1944|TEXT 196
1945|TEXT
1946|tabe sei yavanere ami ta' puchila
1947|hindu 'hari' bale, tara svabhava janila
1948|SYNONYMS
1949|tabe-then; sei-that; yavanere-from the meat-eaters; ami-I;
>|ta'-certainly; puchila-inquired; hindu-the Hindu; hari bale-
>|says Hari; tara-his; svabhava-nature; janila-I know.
1950|TRANSLATION
1951|"I then inquired from these yavanas, 'I know that these
>|Hindus by nature chant "Hari, Hari."
1952|Adi 17.197
1953|TEXT 197
1954|TEXT
1955|tumita yavana hana kene anuksana
1956|hindura devatara nama laha ki karana
1957|SYNONYMS
1958|tumita-but you; yavana-meat-eaters; hana-being; kene-why;
>|anuksana-always; hindura-of the Hindus; devatara-of the God;
>| nama-the name; laha-you take; ki-what; karana-the reason.
1959|TRANSLATION
1960|"'The Hindus chant the name Hari because that is the name
>|of their God. But you are Muslim meat-eaters. Why do you
>|chant the name of the Hindus' God?'
1961|Adi 17.198
1962|TEXT 198
1963|TEXT
1964|mleccha kahe,-hindure ami kari parihasa
1965|keha keha-krsnadasa, keha-ramadasa
1966|SYNONYMS
1967|mleccha-the meat-eater; kahe-says; hindure-unto a Hindu;
>|ami-I; kari-do; parihasa-joking; keha keha-some of them;
>|krsnadasa-Krsnadasa; keha-some of them;
>|ramadasa- Ramadasa.
1968|TRANSLATION
1969|"The meat-eater replied, 'Sometimes I joke with the Hindus.
>|Some of them are called Krsnadasa, and some are called
>|Ramadasa.
1970|Adi 17.199
1971|TEXT 199
1972|TEXT
1973|keha-haridasa, sada bale 'hari' 'hari'
1974|jani kara ghare dhana karibeka curi
1975|SYNONYMS
1976|keha-some of them; haridasa-Haridasa; sada-
>|always; bale-says; hari hari-the name of the Lord, "Hari,
>|Hari"; jani-I understand; kara-someone's; ghare-at home;
>|dhana-wealth; karibeka-will do; curi-theft.
1977|TRANSLATION
1978|"'Some of them are called Haridasa. They always chant "
>|Hari, Hari," and thus I thought they would steal the riches
>|from someone's house.
1979|PURPORT
1980|Another meaning of "Hari, Hari" is "I am stealing. I am
>|stealing."
1981|Adi 17.200
1982|TEXT 200
1983|TEXT
1984|sei haite jihva mora bale 'hari' 'hari'
1985|iccha nahi, tabu bale,-ki upaya kari
1986|SYNONYMS
1987|sei haite-from that time; jihva-tongue; mora-my; bale-says;
>|hari hari-the vibration "Hari, Hari"; iccha-desire; nahi-
>|there is none; tabu-still; bale-says; ki-what; upaya-means;
>|kari-I may do.
1988|TRANSLATION
1989|"'Since that time, my tongue also always vibrates the
>|sound "Hari, Hari." I have no desire to say it, but still
>|my tongue says it. I do not know what to do.'
1990|PURPORT
1991|Sometimes demoniac nonbelievers, not understanding the
>|potency of the holy name, make fun of the Vaisnavas when
>|the Vaisnavas chant the Hare Krsna maha-mantra. This joking
>|is also beneficial for such persons. Srimad-Bhagavatam,
>|Sixth Canto, Second Chapter, verse 14, indicates that the
>|chanting of the Hare Krsna maha-mantra, even in joking, in
>|the course of ordinary discussion, in indicating something
>|extraneous, or in negligence, is called namabhasa, which is
>|chanting that is almost on the transcendental stage. This
>|namabhasa stage is better than namaparadha. Namabhasa
>|awakens the supreme remembrance of Lord Visnu. When one
>|remembers Lord Visnu, he becomes free from material
>|enjoyment. Thus he gradually comes forward toward the
>|transcendental service of the Lord and becomes eligible to
>|chant the holy name of the Lord in the transcendental
>|position.
1992|Adi 17.201–202
1993|TEXTS 201–202
1994|TEXT
1995|ara mleccha kahe, suna-ami ta' ei-mate
1996|hinduke parihasa kainu se dina ha-ite
1997|jihva krsna-nama kare, na mane varjana
1998|na jani, ki mantrausadhi jane hindu-gana
1999|SYNONYMS
2000|ara-another; mleccha-meat-eater; kahe-said; suna-please
>|hear; ami-I; ta'-certainly; ei-mate-in this way; hinduke-to
>|a Hindu; parihasa-joking; kainu-did; se-that; dina-day; ha-
>|ite-from; jihva-the tongue; krsna-nama-the holy name of
>|Lord Krsna; kare-chants; na-does not; mane-accept; varjana-
>|renunciation; na-not; jani-I know; ki-what; mantra-ausadhi-
>|hymns and herbs; jane-know; hindu-gana-the Hindus.
2001|TRANSLATION
2002|"Another meat-eater said, 'Sir, please hear me. Since the
>|day I joked with some Hindus in this way, my tongue chants
>|the Hare Krsna hymn and cannot give it up. I do not know
>|what mystic hymns and herbal potions these Hindus know.'
2003|Adi 17.203
2004|TEXT 203
2005|TEXT
2006|eta suni' ta'-sabhare ghare pathaila
2007|hena-kale pasandi hindu panca-sata aila
2008|SYNONYMS
2009|eta suni'-after hearing all this; ta'-sabhare-all of them;
>|ghare-back home; pathaila-sent; hena-kale-at that time;
>|pasandi-nonbeliever; hindu-Hindus; panca-sata-five or seven;
>| aila-came.
2010|TRANSLATION
2011|"After hearing all this, I sent all the mlecchas back to
>|their homes. Five or seven nonbelieving Hindus then
>|approached me.
2012|PURPORT
2013|The word pasandi refers to nonbelievers engaged in fruitive
>|activities and to idolatrous worshipers of many demigods.
>|Pasandis do not believe in one God, the Supreme Personality,
>| Lord Visnu; they think that all the demigods have the same
>|potency as He. The definition of a pasandi is given in the
>|tantra-sastra:
2014|yas tu narayanam devam brahma-rudradi-daivataih
2015|samatvenaiva vikseta sa pasandi bhaved dhruvam
2016| [Cc. Madhya 18.116]
2017|"A pasandi is one who considers the great demigods
>|such as Lord Brahma and Lord Siva equal to the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, Narayana." (Hari-bhakti-vilasa,
>|1.17)
2018|The Supreme Personality of Godhead is asamaurdhva;
>|in other words, no one can be equal to or
>|greater than Him. But pasandis do not believe this. They
>|worship any kind of demigod, thinking it all right to
>|accept whomever they please as the Supreme Lord . The
>|pasandis were against the Hare Krsna movement of Lord Sri
>|Krsna Caitanya Mahaprabhu, and now we see practically that
>|they also do not like our humble attempts to spread Krsna
>|consciousness all over the world. On the contrary, these
>|pasandis say that we are spoiling the Hindu religion
>|because people all over the world are accepting Lord Krsna
>|as the Supreme Personality of Godhead according to the
>|version of Bhagavad-gita As It Is. The pasandis condemn
>|this movement, and sometimes they accuse Vaisnavas
>|from foreign countries of being not bona fide. Even
>|so- called Vaisnavas- pseudo followers of the Vaisnava
>|cult-do not agree with our activities in making Vaisnavas
>|in the Western countries. Such pasandis existed even during
>|the time of Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, and they continue
>|to exist. Despite all the activities of these pasandis,
>|however, the prediction of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu will
>|triumph: prthivite ache yata nagaradi grama/ sarvatra
>|pracara haibe mora nama. "In every town and village, the
>|chanting of My name will be heard." No one can check the
>|spread of the Krsna consciousness movement because upon
>|this movement is the benediction of the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead, Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
2019|Adi 17.204
2020|TEXT 204
2021|TEXT
2022|asi' kahe,-hindura dharma bhangila nimai
2023|ye kirtana pravartaila, kabhu suni nai
2024|SYNONYMS
2025|asi'-coming there; kahe-they said; hindura-of the Hindus;
>|dharma-religious principles; bhangila-has broken; nimai-
>|Nimai Pandita; ye-that; kirtana-congregational chanting;
>|pravartaila-has introduced; kabhu-at any time; suni-we
>|heard; nai-never.
2026|TRANSLATION
2027|"Coming to me, the Hindus complained, 'Nimai Pandita has
>|broken the Hindu religious principles. He has introduced
>|the sankirtana system, which we never heard from any
>|scripture.
2028|Adi 17.205
2029|TEXT 205
2030|TEXT
2031|mangalacandi visahari kari' jagarana
2032|ta'te vadya, nrtya, gita,-yogya acarana
2033|SYNONYMS
2034|mangala-candi-of the religious performance for worship of
>|Mangalacandi; visahari-of the religious performance for
>|worship of Visahari; kari'-observing; jagarana-night vigil;
>|ta'te-in that ceremony; vadya-musical performance; nrtya-
>|dancing; gita-chanting; yogya-suitable; acarana-custom.
2035|TRANSLATION
2036|"'When we keep a night-long vigil to observe
>|religious performances for the worship of Mangalacandi and
>|Visahari, playing on musical instruments, dancing and
>|chanting are certainly fitting customs.
2037|Adi 17.206
2038|TEXT 206
2039|TEXT
2040|purve bhala chila ei nimai pandita
2041|gaya haite asiya calaya viparita
2042|SYNONYMS
2043|purve-before this; bhala-very good; chila-was; ei-this;
>|nimai pandita-Nimai Pandita; gaya-Gaya (a place
>|of pilgrimage); haite-from; asiya-coming; calaya-conducts;
>|viparita-just the opposite.
2044|TRANSLATION
2045|"'Nimai Pandita was previously a very good boy, but since
>|He has returned from Gaya He conducts Himself differently.
2046|Adi 17.207
2047|TEXT 207
2048|TEXT
2049|ucca kari' gaya gita, deya karatali
2050|mrdanga-karatala-sabde karne lage tali
2051|SYNONYMS
2052|ucca-loud; kari'-making; gaya-sings; gita-songs; deya-
>|practices; karatali-clapping; mrdanga-mrdanga drum;
>|karatala-hand cymbals; sabde-by sounds; karne-in the ear;
>|lage-there is; tali-blocking.
2053|TRANSLATION
2054|"'Now He loudly sings all kinds of songs, claps,
>|and plays drums and hand cymbals, making a
>|tumultuous sound that deafens our ears.
2055|Adi 17.208
2056|TEXT 208
2057|TEXT
2058|na jani,-ki khana matta hana nace, gaya
2059|hase, kande, pade, uthe, gadagadi yaya
2060|SYNONYMS
2061|na jani-we do not know; ki-what; khana-eating; matta-mad;
>|hana-becoming; nace-He dances; gaya-chants; hase-laughs;
>|kande-cries; pade-falls down; uthe-gets up; gadagadi yaya-
>|goes rolling on the ground.
2062|TRANSLATION
2063|"'We do not know what He eats that makes Him become mad,
>|dancing, singing, sometimes laughing, crying, falling down,
>|jumping up and rolling on the ground.
2064|Adi 17.209
2065|TEXT 209
2066|TEXT
2067|nagariyake pagala kaila sada sankirtana
2068|ratre nidra nahi yai, kari jagarana
2069|SYNONYMS
2070|nagariyake-all the citizens; pagala-mad; kaila-He has made;
>|sada-always; sankirtana-congregational chanting; ratre-at
>|night; nidra-sleep; nahi yai-we do not get; kari-observe;
>|jagarana-wakefulness.
2071|TRANSLATION
2072|"'He has made all the people practically mad by always
>|performing congregational chanting. At night we cannot get
>|any sleep; we are always kept awake.
2073|Adi 17.210
2074|TEXT 210
2075|TEXT
2076|'nimani' nama chadi' ebe bolaya 'gaurahari'
2077|hindura dharma nasta kaila pasanda sancari'
2078|SYNONYMS
2079|nimani-Nimai; nama-the name; chadi'-giving up; ebe-now;
>|bolaya-calls; gaurahari-Gaurahari; hindura-of the Hindus;
>|dharma-the religious principles; nasta kaila-spoiled;
>|pasanda-irreligion; sancari'-introducing.
2080|TRANSLATION
2081|"'Now He has given up His own name Nimai and introduced
>|Himself by the name Gaurahari. He has spoiled the Hindu
>|religious principles and introduced the irreligion of
>|nonbelievers.
2082|Adi 17.211
2083|TEXT 211
2084|TEXT
2085|krsnera kirtana kare nica bada bada
2086|ei pape navadvipa ha-ibe ujada
2087|SYNONYMS
2088|krsnera-of Lord Krsna; kirtana-chanting; kare-does; nica-
>|lower class; bada bada-again and again; ei pape-by this sin;
>| navadvipa-the whole city of Navadvipa; ha-ibe-will become;
>|ujada-deserted.
2089|TRANSLATION
2090|"'Now the lower classes are chanting the Hare Krsna maha-
>|mantra again and again. For this sinful activity, the
>|entire city of Navadvipa will become deserted.
2091|Adi 17.212
2092|TEXT 212
2093|TEXT
2094|hindu-sastre 'isvara' nama-maha-mantra jani
2095|sarva-loka sunile mantrera virya haya hani
2096|SYNONYMS
2097|hindu-sastre-in the scriptures of the Hindus; isvara-God;
>|nama-the holy name; maha-mantra-topmost hymn; jani-we know;
>|sarva-loka-everyone; sunile-if they hear; mantrera-of the
>|mantra; virya-potency; haya-becomes; hani-finished.
2098|TRANSLATION
2099|"'According to Hindu scripture, God's name is the most
>|powerful hymn. If everyone hears the chanting of the name,
>|the potency of the hymn will be lost.
2100|PURPORT
2101|In the list of offenses in the chanting of the holy name of
>|the Lord, it is said, dharma-vrata-tyaga-hutadi-sarva-subha-
>|kriya-samyam api pramadah: to consider the chanting of the
>|holy name of the Lord equal to the execution of some
>|auspicious religious ceremony is an offense. According to
>|the materialistic point of view, observing a religious
>|ceremony invokes an auspicious atmosphere for the material
>|benefit of the entire world. Materialists therefore
>|manufacture religious principles to live comfortably and
>|without disturbance in executing their material activities.
>|Since they do not believe in the existence of God, they
>|have manufactured the idea that God is impersonal and that
>|to have some conception of God one may imagine any form.
>|Thus they respect the many forms of the demigods as
>|different representations or manifestations of the Lord.
>|They are called bahv-isvara-vadis, or followers of
>|thousands and thousands of gods. They consider the chanting
>|of the names of the demigods an auspicious activity. Great
>|so-called svamis have written books saying that one may
>|chant any name-Durga, Kali, Siva, Krsna, Rama, and so on-
>|because any name is all right for invoking an auspicious
>|atmosphere in society. Thus they are called pasandis-
>|unbelievers or faithless demons.
2102|Such pasandis do not know the actual value of the chanting
>|of the holy name of Lord Krsna. Foolishly proud of their
>|material birth as brahmanas and their consequently higher
>|position in the social order, they think of the other
>|classes-namely the ksatriyas, vaisyas and sudras-as lower
>|classes. According to them, no one but the brahmanas can
>|chant the holy name of Krsna, for if others chanted the
>|holy name, its potency would be reduced. They are unaware
>|of the potency of Lord Krsna's name. The Brhan-naradiya
>|Purana recommends:
2103|harer nama harer nama harer namaiva kevalam
2104|kalau nasty eva nasty eva nasty eva gatir anyatha
2105| [Cc. Adi 17. 21 ]
2106|"For spiritual progress in this Age of Kali, there is
>|no alternative, no alternative, no alternative to the holy
>|name, the holy name, the holy name of the Lord." The
>|pasandis do not accept that the potency of the holy name of
>|Krsna is so great that one can be delivered simply by
>|chanting the holy name, although this is confirmed in
>|Srimad-Bhagavatam (12.3.51): kirtanad eva krsnasya mukta-
>|sangah param vrajet. Any man from any part of the world who
>|practices chanting of the holy name of Krsna can be
>|liberated and after death go back home, back to Godhead.
>|The rascal pasandis think that if anyone but a brahmana
>|chants the holy name, the potency of the holy name is
>|vanquished. According to their judgment, instead of
>|delivering the fallen souls, the potency of the holy name
>|is reduced. Believing in the existence of many gods and
>|considering the chanting of the holy name of Krsna no
>|better than other hymns, these pasandis do not believe in
>|the words of the sastra (harer nama harer nama harer
>|namaiva kevalam). But Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu confirms in
>|His Siksastaka, kirtaniyah sada harih: [Cc. Adi 17.31] one
>|must chant the holy name of the Lord always, twenty-four
>|hours a day. The pasandis, however, are so fallen and
>|falsely proud of having taken birth in brahmana families
>|that they think that instead of delivering all the fallen
>|souls, the holy name becomes impotent when constantly
>|chanted by lower-class men.
2107|Significant in verse 211 are the words krsnera kirtana kare
>|nica bada bada, indicating that anyone can join in the
>|sankirtana movement. This is confirmed in Srimad-Bhagavatam
>|(2.4.18): kirata-hunandhra-pulinda-pulkasa abhira-sumbha
>|yavanah khasadayah. This is a list of the names of candalas.
>| The pasandis say that when these lower-class men are
>|allowed to chant, their influence is enhanced. They do not
>|like the idea that others should also develop spiritual
>|qualities, because this would curb their false pride in
>|having taken birth in families of the elevated brahmana
>|caste, with a monopoly on spiritual activities. But despite
>|all protests from so-called Hindus and members of the
>|brahmana caste, we are propagating the Krsna consciousness
>|movement all over the world, according to the injunctions
>|of the sastras and the order of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
>|Thus we are sure that we are delivering many fallen souls,
>|making them bona fide candidates for going back home, back
>|to Godhead.
2108|Adi 17.213
2109|TEXT 213
2110|TEXT
2111|gramera thakura tumi, saba tomara jana
2112|nimai bolaiya tare karaha varjana
2113|SYNONYMS
2114|gramera-of this town; thakura-the ruler; tumi-you; saba-all;
>| tomara-your; jana-people; nimai-Nimai Pandita; bolaiya-
>|calling; tare-unto Him; karaha-do; varjana-the punishment
>|of making Him leave the town.
2115|TRANSLATION
2116|"'Sir, you are the ruler of this town. Whether Hindu or
>|Muslim, everyone is under your protection. Therefore please
>|call Nimai Pandita and make Him leave the town.'
2117|PURPORT
2118|The word thakura has two meanings. One meaning is "God" or "
>|a godly person," and another meaning is ksatriya. Here
>|the pasandi brahmanas address the Kazi as thakura,
>|considering him the ruler of the town. There are different
>|names by which to address the members of different castes.
>|The brahmanas are addressed as maharaja, the ksatriyas as
>|thakura, the vaisyas as setha or mahajana, and the sudras
>|as caudhuri. This etiquette is still followed in northern
>|India, where the ksatriyas are addressed as Thakura Sahab.
>|The pasandis went so far as to request the magistrate, or
>|Kazi, to have Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu expelled from the
>|town because of His introducing hari-nama-sankirtana.
>|Fortunately our Hare Krsna movement all over the world,
>|especially in the civilized world of Europe and America,
>|has become very popular. Generally no one complains against
>|us to have us removed from a city. Although such an attempt
>|was indeed made in Melbourne, Australia, the attempt failed.
>| Thus we are now introducing this Hare Krsna movement in
>|great cities of the world like New York, London, Paris,
>|Tokyo, Sydney, Melbourne and Auckland, and by the grace of
>|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu everything is going on nicely.
>|People are happy to accept the principle of chanting the
>|Hare Krsna mantra, and the result is most satisfactory.
2119|Adi 17.214
2120|TEXT 214
2121|TEXT
2122|tabe ami priti-vakya kahila sabare
2123|sabe ghare yaha, ami nisedhiba tare
2124|SYNONYMS
2125|tabe-thereafter; ami-I; priti-vakya-sweet words; kahila-
>|said; sabare-unto all of them; sabe-all of you; ghare-back
>|home; yaha-go; ami-I; nisedhiba-shall prohibit; tare-Him (
>|Nimai Pandita).
2126|TRANSLATION
2127|"After hearing their complaints, in sweet words I told them,
>| 'Please go back home. I shall certainly prohibit Nimai
>|Pandita from continuing His Hare Krsna movement.'
2128|Adi 17.215
2129|TEXT 215
2130|TEXT
2131|hindura isvara bada yei narayana
2132|sei tumi hao,-hena laya mora mana
2133|SYNONYMS
2134|hindura-of the Hindus; isvara-God; bada-the topmost; yei-
>|who; narayana-Lord Narayana; sei-He; tumi-You; hao-are;
>|hena-such; laya-takes; mora-my; mana-mind.
2135|TRANSLATION
2136|"I know that Narayana is the Supreme God of the Hindus, and
>|I think that You are the same Narayana. This I feel within
>|my mind."
2137|Adi 17.216
2138|TEXT 216
2139|TEXT
2140|eta suni' mahaprabhu hasiya hasiya
2141|kahite lagila kichu kajire chuniya
2142|SYNONYMS
2143|eta-this; suni'-hearing; mahaprabhu-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu;
>| hasiya hasiya-smiling; kahite-to speak; lagila-began;
>|kichu-something; kajire-unto the Kazi; chuniya-touching.
2144|TRANSLATION
2145|After hearing the Kazi speak so nicely, Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu touched him and smilingly spoke as follows.
2146|Adi 17.217
2147|TEXT 217
2148|TEXT
2149|tomara mukhe krsna-nama,-e bada vicitra
2150|papa-ksaya gela, haila parama pavitra
2151|SYNONYMS
2152|tomara mukhe-in your mouth; krsna-nama-chanting of the holy
>|name of Krsna; e-this; bada-very; vicitra-wonderful; papa-
>|ksaya-nullifying of sinful activities; gela-has become a
>|fact; haila-have become; parama-topmost; pavitra-purified.
2153|TRANSLATION
2154|"The chanting of the holy name of Krsna from your mouth has
>|performed a wonder-it has nullified the reactions of all
>|your sinful activities. Now you have become supremely pure.
2155|PURPORT
2156|Confirming the potency of the sankirtana movement, these
>|words from the very mouth of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu
>|express how people can be purified simply by chanting the
>|holy name of Lord Krsna. The Kazi was a Muslim mleccha, or
>|meat-eater, but because he several times uttered the holy
>|name of Lord Krsna, automatically the reactions of his
>|sinful life were vanquished and he was fully purified of
>|all material contamination. We do not know why the pasandis
>|of the present day protest that we are deteriorating the
>|Hindu religion by spreading Krsna consciousness all over
>|the world and claiming all classes of men to the highest
>|standard of Vaisnavism. But these rascals disagree with us
>|so vehemently that some of them do not allow European and
>|American Vaisnavas to enter the temples of Visnu.
>|Thinking religion to be meant for material benefit, these
>|so-called Hindus have actually become vicious by worshiping
>|the numerous forms of the demigods. In the next verse Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu confirms the Kazi's purification.
2157|Adi 17.218
2158|TEXT 218
2159|TEXT
2160|'hari' 'krsna' 'narayana'-laile tina nama
2161|bada bhagyavan tumi, bada punyavan
2162|SYNONYMS
2163|hari krsna narayana-the holy names of Lord Hari, Lord Krsna
>|and Lord Narayana; laile-you have taken; tina-three; nama-
>|holy names; bada-very; bhagyavan-fortunate; tumi-you are;
>|bada-very; punyavan-pious.
2164|TRANSLATION
2165|"Because you have chanted three holy names of the Lord-Hari,
>| Krsna and Narayana-you are undoubtedly the most fortunate
>|and pious."
2166|PURPORT
2167|Here the Supreme Lord, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, confirms
>|that anyone who chants the holy names Hari, Krsna and
>|Narayana without offense is certainly extremely fortunate,
>|and whether Indian or non-Indian, Hindu or non-Hindu, he
>|immediately comes to the level of the most pious
>|personality. We therefore do not care about the statements
>|of pasandis who protest against our movement's making the
>|members of other cities or countries into Vaisnavas. We
>|have to follow in the footsteps of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu,
>| executing our mission peacefully, or, if necessary,
>|kicking the heads of such protesters.
2168|Adi 17.219
2169|TEXT 219
2170|TEXT
2171|eta suni' kajira dui cakse pade pani
2172|prabhura carana chuni' bale priya-vani
2173|SYNONYMS
2174|eta-this; suni'-hearing; kajira-of the Kazi; dui-two; cakse-
>|in the eyes; pade-flow down; pani-tears; prabhura-of the
>|Lord; carana-lotus feet; chuni'-touching; bale-says; priya-
>|vani-pleasing words.
2175|TRANSLATION
2176|After the Kazi heard this, tears flowed down from his eyes.
>|He immediately touched the lotus feet of the Lord and spoke
>|the following sweet words.
2177|Adi 17.220
2178|TEXT 220
2179|TEXT
2180|tomara prasade mora ghucila kumati
2181|ei krpa kara,-yena tomate rahu bhakti
2182|SYNONYMS
2183|tomara prasade-by Your mercy; mora-my; ghucila-have gone
>|away; kumati-bad intentions; ei-this; krpa-mercy; kara-
>|please do unto me; yena-so that; tomate-in You; rahu-may
>|stay; bhakti-devotion.
2184|TRANSLATION
2185|"Only by Your mercy have my bad intentions vanished. Kindly
>|favor me so that my devotion may always be fixed upon You."
2186|Adi 17.221
2187|TEXT 221
2188|TEXT
2189|prabhu kahe,-eka dana magiye tomaya
2190|sankirtana vada yaiche nahe nadiyaya
2191|SYNONYMS
2192|prabhu kahe-the Lord said; eka-one; dana-charity; magiye-I
>|beg; tomaya-from you; sankirtana-chanting of the Hare Krsna
>|mantra; vada-opposition; yaiche-as it may be; nahe-not be;
>|nadiyaya-in the district of Nadia.
2193|TRANSLATION
2194|The Lord said, "I wish to beg you for one favor in charity.
>|You must pledge that this sankirtana movement will not be
>|checked, at least in the district of Nadia."
2195|Adi 17.222
2196|TEXT 222
2197|TEXT
2198|kaji kahe,-mora vamse yata upajibe
2199|tahake 'talaka' diba,-kirtana na badhibe
2200|SYNONYMS
2201|kaji kahe-the Kazi said; mora-my; vamse-in the dynasty;
>|yata-all (descendants); upajibe-who will take birth; tahake-
>|unto them; talaka-grave admonition; diba-I shall give;
>|kirtana-the sankirtana movement; na-never; badhibe-they
>|will oppose.
2202|TRANSLATION
2203|The Kazi said, "To as many descendants as take birth in my
>|dynasty in the future, I give this grave admonition: No one
>|should check the sankirtana movement."
2204|PURPORT
2205|As a result of this grave injunction by the Kazi, even at
>|present the descendants of the Kazi's family do not oppose
>|the sankirtana movement under any circumstances. Even
>|during the great Hindu-Muslim riots in neighboring places,
>|the descendants of the Kazi honestly preserved the
>|assurance given by their forefather.
2206|Adi 17.223
2207|TEXT 223
2208|TEXT
2209|suni' prabhu 'hari' bali' uthila apani
2210|uthila vaisnava saba kari' hari-dhvani
2211|SYNONYMS
2212|suni'-hearing; prabhu-the Lord; hari-the holy name of the
>|Lord; bali'-chanting; uthila-got up; apani-personally;
>|uthila-got up; vaisnava-other devotees; saba-all; kari'-
>|making; hari-dhvani-vibration of the holy name, "Hari Hari."
2213|TRANSLATION
2214|Hearing this, the Lord got up, chanting "Hari! Hari!"
>|Following Him, all the other Vaisnavas also got up,
>|chanting the vibration of the holy name.
2215|Adi 17.224
2216|TEXT 224
2217|TEXT
2218|kirtana karite prabhu karila gamana
2219|sange cali' aise kaji ullasita mana
2220|SYNONYMS
2221|kirtana-chanting; karite-to perform; prabhu-the Lord;
>|karila-made; gamana-departure; sange-accompanying Him; cali'
>|-walking; aise-comes; kaji-the Kazi; ullasita-jubilant;
>|mana-mind.
2222|TRANSLATION
2223|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu went back to perform kirtana, and
>|the Kazi, his mind jubilant, went with Him.
2224|Adi 17.225
2225|TEXT 225
2226|TEXT
2227|kajire vidaya dila sacira nandana
2228|nacite nacite aila apana bhavana
2229|SYNONYMS
2230|kajire-unto the Kazi; vidaya-farewell; dila-gave; sacira-of
>|mother Saci; nandana-the son; nacite nacite-dancing and
>|dancing; aila-came back; apana-own; bhavana-house.
2231|TRANSLATION
2232|The Lord asked the Kazi to go back home. Then the son of
>|mother Saci came back to His own home, dancing and dancing.
2233|Adi 17.226
2234|TEXT 226
2235|TEXT
2236|ei mate kajire prabhu karila prasada
2237|iha yei sune tara khande aparadha
2238|SYNONYMS
2239|ei mate-in this way; kajire-unto the Kazi; prabhu-the Lord;
>|karila-did; prasada-mercy; iha-this; yei-anyone who; sune-
>|hears; tara-his; khande-vanquishes; aparadha-offenses.
2240|TRANSLATION
2241|This is the incident concerning the Kazi and the Lord's
>|mercy upon him. Anyone who hears this is also freed from
>|all offenses.
2242|Adi 17.227
2243|TEXT 227
2244|TEXT
2245|eka dina srivasera mandire gosani
2246|nityananda-sange nrtya kare dui bhai
2247|SYNONYMS
2248|eka dina-one day; srivasera-of Srivasa Thakura; mandire-in
>|the house; gosani-Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu; nityananda-Lord
>|Nityananda; sange-accompanied by; nrtya-dancing; kare-
>|performed; dui-two; bhai-brothers.
2249|TRANSLATION
2250|One day the two brothers Lord Nityananda Prabhu and Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu were dancing in the holy house of
>|Srivasa Thakura.
2251|Adi 17.228
2252|TEXT 228
2253|TEXT
2254|srivasa-putrera tahan haila paraloka
2255|tabu srivasera citte na janmila soka
2256|SYNONYMS
2257|srivasa-of Srivasa Thakura; putrera-of the son; tahan-there;
>| haila-took place; paraloka-death; tabu-still; srivasera-of
>|Srivasa Thakura; citte-in the mind; na-not; janmila-there
>|was; soka-lamentation.
2258|TRANSLATION
2259|At that time a calamity took place-Srivasa Thakura's son
>|died. Yet Srivasa Thakura was not at all sorry.
2260|Adi 17.229
2261|TEXT 229
2262|TEXT
2263|mrta-putra-mukhe kaila jnanera kathana
2264|apane dui bhai haila srivasa-nandana
2265|SYNONYMS
2266|mrta-putra-of the dead son; mukhe-in the mouth; kaila-did;
>|jnanera-of knowledge; kathana-conversation; apane-
>|personally; dui-the two; bhai-brothers; haila-became;
>|srivasa-nandana-sons of Srivasa Thakura.
2267|TRANSLATION
2268|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu caused the dead son to speak about
>|knowledge, and then the two brothers personally became the
>|sons of Srivasa Thakura.
2269|PURPORT
2270|This incident is described as follows by Srila Bhaktivinoda
>|Thakura in his Amrta-pravaha-bhasya. One night while Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu was dancing with His devotees at the
>|house of Srivasa Thakura, one of Srivasa Thakura's sons,
>|who was suffering from some disease, died. Srivasa Thakura
>|was so patient, however, that he did not allow anyone to
>|express sorrow by crying, for he did not want the kirtana
>|going on at his house to be disturbed. Thus kirtana
>|continued without a sound of lamentation. But when the
>|kirtana was over, Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who could understand
>|the incident, declared, "There must have been some calamity
>|in this house." When He was then informed about the death
>|of Srivasa Thakura's son, He expressed His regret, saying, "
>|Why was this news not given to Me before?" He went to the
>|place where the son was lying dead and asked him, "My dear
>|boy, why are you leaving the house of Srivasa Thakura?" The
>|dead son immediately replied, "I was living in this house
>|as long as I was destined to live here. Now that the time
>|is over, I am going elsewhere, according to Your direction.
>|I am Your eternal servant, a dependent living being. I must
>|act only according to Your desire. Beyond Your desire, I
>|cannot do anything. I have no such power." Hearing these
>|words of the dead son, all the members of Srivasa Thakura's
>|family received transcendental knowledge. Thus there was no
>|cause for lamentation. This transcendental knowledge is
>|described in the Bhagavad-gita (2.13): tatha dehantara-
>|praptir dhiras tatra na muhyati. When someone dies, he
>|accepts another body; therefore sober persons do not lament.
>| After the discourse between the dead boy and Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, funeral ceremonies were performed, and Lord
>|Caitanya assured Srivasa Thakura, "You have lost one son,
>|but Nityananda Prabhu and I are your eternal sons. We shall
>|never be able to give up your company." This is an instance
>|of a transcendental relationship with Krsna. We have
>|eternal transcendental relationships with Krsna as His
>|servants, friends, fathers, sons or conjugal lovers. When
>|the same relationships are pervertedly reflected in this
>|material world, we have relationships as the sons, fathers,
>|friends, lovers, masters or servants of others, but all
>|these relationships are subject to termination within a
>|definite period. If we revive our relationship with Krsna,
>|however, by the grace of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu our
>|eternal relationship will never break to cause our
>|lamentation.
2271|Adi 17.230
2272|TEXT 230
2273|TEXT
2274|tabe ta' karila saba bhakte vara dana
2275|ucchista diya narayanira karila sammana
2276|SYNONYMS
2277|tabe-thereafter; ta'-certainly; karila-did; saba bhakte-
>|unto all devotees; vara-benediction; dana-charity; ucchista-
>|food remnants; diya-giving; narayanira-of Narayani; karila-
>|did; sammana-respect.
2278|TRANSLATION
2279|Thereafter the Lord charitably bestowed His benediction
>|upon all His devotees. He gave the remnants of His food to
>|Narayani, showing her special respect.
2280|PURPORT
2281|Narayani was a niece of Srivasa Thakura, and later she
>|became the mother of Srila Vrndavana dasa Thakura. In this
>|connection the sahajiyas cite a malicious story that after
>|eating the remnants of Lord Caitanya's food Narayani became
>|pregnant and gave birth to Vrndavana dasa Thakura. The
>|rascal sahajiyas may manufacture such false statements, but
>|no one should believe them because they are motivated by
>|enmity against the Vaisnavas.
2282|Adi 17.231
2283|TEXT 231
2284|TEXT
2285|srivasera vastra sinye daraji yavana
2286|prabhu tare nija-rupa karaila darsana
2287|SYNONYMS
2288|srivasera-of Srivasa Thakura; vastra-cloth; sinye-sewing;
>|daraji-tailor; yavana-meat-eater; prabhu-the Lord; tare-
>|unto him; nija-rupa-His own form; karaila-caused; darsana-
>|vision.
2289|TRANSLATION
2290|There was a tailor who was a meat-eater but was sewing
>|garments for Srivasa Thakura. The Lord, being merciful to
>|him, showed him His own form.
2291|Adi 17.232
2292|TEXT 232
2293|TEXT
2294|'dekhinu' 'dekhinu' bali' ha-ila pagala
2295|preme nrtya kare, haila vaisnava agala
2296|SYNONYMS
2297|dekhinu-I have seen; dekhinu-I have seen; bali'-saying; ha-
>|ila-became; pagala-mad; preme-in the ecstasy of love; nrtya-
>|dancing; kare-does; haila-became; vaisnava-devotee; agala-
>|first class.
2298|TRANSLATION
2299|Saying "I have seen! I have seen!" and dancing in ecstatic
>|love as though mad, he became a first-class Vaisnava.
2300|PURPORT
2301|There was a Muslim tailor near the house of Srivasa Thakura
>|who used to sew the garments of the family. One day he was
>|very pleased with the dancing of Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; indeed, he was enchanted. The Lord,
>|understanding his attitude, showed him His original form as
>|Krsna. The tailor then began to dance, saying, "I have seen!
>| I have seen!" He became absorbed in ecstatic love and
>|began to dance with Lord Caitanya. Thus he became one of
>|the foremost Vaisnava adherents of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
2302|Adi 17.233
2303|TEXT 233
2304|TEXT
2305|avesete srivase prabhu vamsi ta' magila
2306|srivasa kahe,-vamsi tomara gopi hari' nila
2307|SYNONYMS
2308|avesete-in ecstasy; srivase-unto Srivasa; prabhu-the Lord;
>|vamsi-a flute; ta'-certainly; magila-asked; srivasa-Srivasa
>|Thakura; kahe-replied; vamsi-flute; tomara-Your; gopi-the
>|gopis; hari-stealing; nila-took away.
2309|TRANSLATION
2310|In ecstasy the Lord asked Srivasa Thakura to deliver His
>|flute, but Srivasa Thakura replied, "Your flute has been
>|stolen away by the gopis."
2311|Adi 17.234
2312|TEXT 234
2313|TEXT
2314|suni' prabhu 'bala' 'bala' balena avese
2315|srivasa varnena vrndavana-lila-rase
2316|SYNONYMS
2317|suni'-hearing; prabhu-the Lord; bala bala-go on speaking,
>|go on speaking; balena-He says; avese-in ecstasy; srivasa-
>|Srivasa Thakura; varnena-describes; vrndavana-of Vrndavana;
>|lila-rase-the transcendental mellows of the pastimes.
2318|TRANSLATION
2319|Hearing this reply, the Lord said in ecstasy, "Go on
>|talking! Go on talking!" Thus Srivasa described the
>|transcendental mellows of the pastimes of Sri Vrndavana.
2320|Adi 17.235
2321|TEXT 235
2322|TEXT
2323|prathamete vrndavana-madhurya varnila
2324|suniya prabhura citte ananda badila
2325|SYNONYMS
2326|prathamete-in the beginning; vrndavana-madhurya-sweet
>|pastimes of Vrndavana; varnila-described; suniya-hearing;
>|prabhura-of the Lord; citte-in the heart; ananda-jubilation;
>| badila-increased.
2327|TRANSLATION
2328|In the beginning Srivasa Thakura described the
>|transcendental sweetness of Vrndavana's pastimes. Hearing
>|this, the Lord felt great and increasing jubilation in His
>|heart.
2329|Adi 17.236
2330|TEXT 236
2331|TEXT
2332|tabe 'bala' 'bala' prabhu bale vara-vara
2333|punah punah kahe srivasa kariya vistara
2334|SYNONYMS
2335|tabe-thereafter; bala bala-go on speaking, go on speaking;
>|prabhu-the Lord; bale-says; vara-vara-again, again; punah
>|punah-again, again; kahe-speaks; srivasa-Srivasa Thakura;
>|kariya-making; vistara-expansion.
2336|TRANSLATION
2337|Thereafter the Lord again and again asked him, "Speak on!
>|Speak on!" Thus Srivasa again and again described the
>|pastimes of Vrndavana, vividly expanding them.
2338|Adi 17.237
2339|TEXT 237
2340|TEXT
2341|vamsi-vadye gopi-ganera vane akarsana
2342|tan-sabara sange yaiche vana-viharana
2343|SYNONYMS
2344|vamsi-vadye-on hearing the sound of the flute; gopi-ganera-
>|of all the gopis; vane-in the forest; akarsana-the
>|attraction; tan-sabara-of all of them; sange-in the company;
>| yaiche-in what way; vana-in the forest; viharana-wandering.
2345|TRANSLATION
2346|Srivasa Thakura extensively explained how the gopis were
>|attracted to the forests of Vrndavana by the vibration of
>|Krsna's flute and how they wandered together in the forest.
2347|Adi 17.238
2348|TEXT 238
2349|TEXT
2350|tahi madhye chaya-rtu lilara varnana
2351|madhu-pana, rasotsava, jala-keli kathana
2352|SYNONYMS
2353|tahi madhye-during that; chaya-rtu-the six seasons; lilara-
>|of the pastimes; varnana-description; madhu-pana-drinking
>|of the honey; rasa-utsava-dancing the rasa-lila; jala-keli-
>|swimming in the Yamuna; kathana-narrations.
2354|TRANSLATION
2355|Srivasa Pandita narrated all the pastimes enacted during
>|the six changing seasons. He described the drinking of
>|honey, the celebration of the rasa dance, the swimming in
>|the Yamuna and other such incidents.
2356|Adi 17.239
2357|TEXT 239
2358|TEXT
2359|'bala' 'bala' bale prabhu sunite ullasa
2360|srivasa kahena tabe rasa rasera vilasa
2361|SYNONYMS
2362|bala bala-go on speaking, go on speaking; bale-says; prabhu-
>|the Lord; sunite-hearing; ullasa-very jubilantly; srivasa-
>|Srivasa Thakura; kahena-says; tabe-then; rasa-rasa dance;
>|rasera-filled with transcendental humors; vilasa-pastimes.
2363|TRANSLATION
2364|When the Lord, hearing with great pleasure, said, "Go on
>|speaking! Go on speaking!" Srivasa Thakura described the
>|rasa-lila dance, which is filled with transcendental
>|mellows.
2365|Adi 17.240
2366|TEXT 240
2367|TEXT
2368|kahite, sunite aiche pratah-kala haila
2369|prabhu srivasere tosi' alingana kaila
2370|SYNONYMS
2371|kahite-speaking; sunite-hearing; aiche-in that way; pratah-
>|kala-morning; haila-appeared; prabhu-Lord Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; srivasere-unto Srivasa Thakura; tosi'-
>|satisfying; alingana-embracing; kaila-did.
2372|TRANSLATION
2373|As the Lord thus requested and Srivasa Thakura spoke, the
>|morning appeared, and the Lord embraced Srivasa Thakura and
>|satisfied him.
2374|Adi 17.241
2375|TEXT 241
2376|TEXT
2377|tabe acaryera ghare kaila krsna-lila
2378|rukmini-svarupa prabhu apane ha-ila
2379|SYNONYMS
2380|tabe-thereafter; acaryera-of Sri Candrasekhara Acarya;
>|ghare-in the house; kaila-performed; krsna-lila-pastimes of
>|Lord Krsna; rukmini-of Rukmini; svarupa-form; prabhu-the
>|Lord; apane-personally; ha-ila-became.
2381|TRANSLATION
2382|Thereafter a dramatization of Krsna's pastimes was
>|performed in the house of Sri Candrasekhara Acarya.
>|The Lord personally took the part of Rukmini, the foremost
>|of Krsna's queens.
2383|Adi 17.242
2384|TEXT 242
2385|TEXT
2386|kabhu durga, laksmi haya, kabhu va cic-chakti
2387|khate vasi' bhakta-gane dila prema-bhakti
2388|SYNONYMS
2389|kabhu-sometimes; durga-the part of Goddess Durga; laksmi-
>|the goddess of fortune; haya-is; kabhu-sometimes; va-or;
>|cit-sakti-the spiritual potency; khate-on a cot; vasi'-
>|sitting; bhakta-gane-unto the devotees; dila-gave; prema-
>|bhakti-love of Godhead.
2390|TRANSLATION
2391|The Lord sometimes took the part of Goddess Durga, Laksmi [
>|the goddess of fortune] or the chief potency, Yogamaya.
>|Sitting on a cot, He delivered love of Godhead to all the
>|devotees present.
2392|Adi 17.243
2393|TEXT 243
2394|TEXT
2395|eka-dina mahaprabhura nrtya-avasane
2396|eka brahmani asi' dharila carane
2397|SYNONYMS
2398|eka-dina-one day; mahaprabhura-of Lord Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; nrtya-avasane-at the end of the dancing; eka-
>|one; brahmani-wife of a brahmana; asi'-coming; dharila-
>|caught hold; carane-of His lotus feet.
2399|TRANSLATION
2400|One day when Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu had finished His
>|dancing, a woman, the wife of a brahmana, came there and
>|caught hold of His lotus feet.
2401|Adi 17.244
2402|TEXT 244
2403|TEXT
2404|caranera dhuli sei laya vara vara
2405|dekhiya prabhura duhkha ha-ila apara
2406|SYNONYMS
2407|caranera-of His lotus feet; dhuli-the dust; sei-that woman;
>|laya-takes; vara vara-again and again; dekhiya-seeing this;
>|prabhura-of the Lord; duhkha-unhappiness; ha-ila-there was;
>|apara-unlimited.
2408|TRANSLATION
2409|As she took the dust of His lotus feet again and again, the
>|Lord became unlimitedly unhappy.
2410|PURPORT
2411|This holding of a great personality's lotus feet is
>|certainly very good for the person who takes the dust, but
>|this example of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's unhappiness
>|indicates that a Vaisnava should not allow anyone to take
>|dust from his feet.
2412|One who takes the dust of a great personality's lotus feet
>|transfers his sinful activities to that great personality.
>|Unless the person whose dust is taken is very strong, he
>|must suffer the sinful activities of the person who takes
>|the dust. Therefore ordinarily it should not be allowed.
>|Sometimes in big meetings people come to take the same
>|advantage by touching our feet. On account of this,
>|sometimes we have to suffer from some disease. As far as
>|possible, no outsider should be allowed to touch one's feet
>|to take dust from them. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu personally
>|showed this by His example, as explained in the next verse.
2413|Adi 17.245
2414|TEXT 245
2415|TEXT
2416|sei-ksane dhana prabhu gangate padila
2417|nityananda-haridasa dhari' uthaila
2418|SYNONYMS
2419|sei-ksane-immediately; dhana-running; prabhu-the Lord;
>|gangate-in the water of the Ganges; padila-plunged;
>|nityananda-Lord Nityananda; haridasa-Haridasa Thakura;
>|dhari'-catching Him; uthaila-raised Him.
2420|TRANSLATION
2421|Immediately He ran to the river Ganges and jumped in to
>|counteract the sinful activities of that woman. Lord
>|Nityananda and Haridasa Thakura caught Him and raised Him
>|from the river.
2422|PURPORT
2423|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu is God Himself, but He was playing
>|the part of a preacher. Every preacher should know that
>|being allowed to touch a Vaisnava's feet and take dust may
>|be good for the person who takes it, but it is not good for
>|the person who allows it to be taken. As far as possible,
>|this practice should ordinarily be avoided. Only initiated
>|disciples should be allowed to take this advantage, not
>|others. Those who are full of sinful activities should
>|generally be avoided.
2424|Adi 17.246
2425|TEXT 246
2426|TEXT
2427|vijaya acaryera ghare se ratre rahila
2428|pratah-kale bhakta sabe ghare lana gela
2429|SYNONYMS
2430|vijaya-named Vijaya; acaryera-of the teacher; ghare-at the
>|home; se-that; ratre-on the night; rahila-remained; pratah-
>|kale-in the morning; bhakta-the devotees; sabe-all; ghare-
>|home; lana-taking them; gela-went.
2431|TRANSLATION
2432|That night the Lord stayed at the house of Vijaya Acarya.
>|In the morning the Lord took all His devotees and returned
>|home.
2433|Adi 17.247
2434|TEXT 247
2435|TEXT
2436|eka-dina gopi-bhave grhete vasiya
2437|'gopi' 'gopi' nama laya visanna hana
2438|SYNONYMS
2439|eka-dina-one day; gopi-bhave-in the ecstasy of the gopis;
>|grhete-at home; vasiya-sitting; gopi gopi-Gopi Gopi ;
>|nama-the name; laya-chants; visanna-morose; hana-becoming.
2440|TRANSLATION
2441|One day the Lord, in the ecstasy of the gopis, was sitting
>|in His house. Very morose in separation, He was calling, "
>|Gopi! Gopi!"
2442|Adi 17.248
2443|TEXT 248
2444|TEXT
2445|eka paduya aila prabhuke dekhite
2446|'gopi' 'gopi' nama suni' lagila balite
2447|SYNONYMS
2448|eka paduya-one student; aila-came there; prabhuke-the Lord;
>|dekhite-to see; gopi gopi-Gopi Gopi ; nama-the name;
>|suni'-hearing; lagila-began; balite-to say.
2449|TRANSLATION
2450|A student who came to see the Lord was astonished that the
>|Lord was chanting "Gopi! Gopi!" Thus he spoke as follows.
2451|Adi 17.249
2452|TEXT 249
2453|TEXT
2454|krsna-nama na lao kene, krsna-nama-dhanya
2455|'gopi' 'gopi' balile va kiba haya punya
2456|SYNONYMS
2457|krsna-nama-the holy name of Lord Krsna; na-not; lao-You
>|take; kene-why; krsna-nama-the holy name of Lord Krsna;
>|dhanya-glorious; gopi gopi-the names Gopi Gopi ; balile-
>|on saying; va-or; kiba-what; haya-there is; punya-piety.
2458|TRANSLATION
2459|"Why are You chanting the names 'gopi Gopi' instead of the
>|holy name of Lord Krsna, which is so glorious? What pious
>|result will You achieve by such chanting?"
2460|PURPORT
2461|It is said, vaisnavera kriya-mudra vijneha na bujhaya: [Cc.
>|Madhya 23.39] no one can understand the activities of a
>|pure devotee. A student or neophyte devotee could not
>|possibly understand why Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu was
>|chanting the name of the gopis, nor should the student have
>|asked the Lord about the potency of chanting Gopi Gopi.
>| The neophyte student was certainly convinced of the piety
>|in the chanting of Krsna's holy name, but this sort of
>|attitude is also offensive. Dharma-vrata-tyaga-hutadi-sarva-
>|subha-kriya-samyam api pramadah: to chant the holy name of
>|Krsna in exchange for the achievement of piety is an
>|offense. This, of course, was unknown to the student. Thus
>|he innocently asked, "What piety is there in the chanting
>|of the name gopi?" He did not know that there is no
>|question of piety or impiety. The chanting of the holy name
>|of Krsna or the holy name gopi is on the transcendental
>|platform of loving affairs. Since he was not expert in
>|understanding such transcendental activities, his question
>|was merely impudent. Thus Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu,
>|apparently greatly angry at him, reacted as follows.
2462|Adi 17.250
2463|TEXT 250
2464|TEXT
2465|suni' prabhu krodhe kaila krsne dosodgara
2466|thenga lana uthila prabhu paduya maribara
2467|SYNONYMS
2468|suni'-hearing; prabhu-the Lord; krodhe-in anger; kaila-did;
>|krsne-unto Lord Krsna; dosa-udgara-many accusations; thenga-
>|stick; lana-taking; uthila-got up; prabhu-the Lord; paduya-
>|the student; maribara-to strike.
2469|TRANSLATION
2470|Hearing the foolish student, the Lord became greatly angry
>|and rebuked Lord Krsna in various ways. Taking up a stick,
>|He rose to strike the student.
2471|PURPORT
2472|It is mentioned in Srimad-Bhagavatam that when Uddhava came
>|from Lord Krsna with a message for the gopis, all the gopis,
>| especially Srimati Radharani, denounced Krsna in various
>|ways. Such denunciations, however, reflect an exuberant
>|loving attitude that an ordinary man cannot understand.
>|When the foolish student questioned Lord Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, Lord Caitanya similarly rebuked Lord Krsna in
>|loving exuberance. When Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu was in the
>|mood of the gopis and the student advocated the cause of
>|Sri Krsna, Lord Caitanya was greatly angry. Seeing His
>|anger, the foolish student, who was an ordinary atheistic
>|smarta-brahmana, foolishly misjudged Him. Thus he and a
>|party of students were ready to strike the Lord in
>|retaliation. After this incident, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu
>|decided to take sannyasa so that people would not commit
>|offenses against Him, considering Him an ordinary
>|householder, for in India even now a sannyasi is naturally
>|offered respect.
2473|Adi 17.251
2474|TEXT 251
2475|TEXT
2476|bhaye palaya paduya, prabhu pache pache dhaya
2477|aste vyaste bhakta-gana prabhure rahaya
2478|SYNONYMS
2479|bhaye-out of fear; palaya-runs away; paduya-the student;
>|prabhu-the Lord; pache pache-after him; dhaya-runs; aste
>|vyaste-somehow or other; bhakta-gana-all the devotees;
>|prabhure-the Lord; rahaya-checked.
2480|TRANSLATION
2481|The student ran away in fear, and the Lord followed him.
>|But somehow or other the devotees checked the Lord.
2482|Adi 17.252
2483|TEXT 252
2484|TEXT
2485|prabhure santa kari' anila nija ghare
2486|paduya palaya gela paduya-sabhare
2487|SYNONYMS
2488|prabhure-the Lord; santa kari'-pacifying; anila-brought;
>|nija-His own; ghare-to the house; paduya-the student;
>|palaya-running away; gela-went; paduya-of students; sabhare-
>|to the assembly.
2489|TRANSLATION
2490|The devotees pacified the Lord and brought Him home, and
>|the student ran away to an assembly of other students.
2491|Adi 17.253
2492|TEXT 253
2493|TEXT
2494|paduya sahasra yahan pade eka-thani
2495|prabhura vrttanta dvija kahe tahan yai
2496|SYNONYMS
2497|paduya-students; sahasra-a thousand; yahan-where; pade-they
>|study; eka-thani-in one place; prabhura-of the Lord;
>|vrttanta-incident; dvija-the brahmana; kahe-says; tahan-
>|there; yai-he goes.
2498|TRANSLATION
2499|The brahmana student ran to a place where a thousand
>|students were studying together. There he described the
>|incident to them.
2500|PURPORT
2501|In this verse we find the word dvija, indicating that the
>|student was a brahmana. Actually, in those days, only
>|members of the brahmana class became students of Vedic
>|literature. Schooling is meant especially for brahmanas;
>|previously there was no question of schooling for ksatriyas,
>| vaisyas or sudras. Ksatriyas used to learn the technology
>|of warfare, and vaisyas learned business from their fathers
>|or other businessmen; they were not meant to study the
>|Vedas. At present, however, everyone goes to school, and
>|everyone is given the same type of education, although no
>|one knows what the result will be. The result, however, is
>|most unsatisfactory, as we have seen in the Western
>|countries especially. The United States has vast
>|educational institutions where everyone is allowed to
>|receive an education, but the result is that most students
>|become like hippies.
2502|Higher education is not meant for everyone. Only selected
>|individuals trained in brahminical culture should be
>|allowed to pursue a higher education. Educational
>|institutions should not aim to teach technology, for a
>|technologist cannot properly be called educated. A
>|technologist is a sudra; only one who studies the Vedas may
>|properly be called a learned man (pandita). The duty of a
>|brahmana is to become learned in the Vedic literature and
>|teach the Vedic knowledge to other brahmanas. In our Krsna
>|consciousness movement we are simply teaching our students
>|to become fit brahmanas and Vaisnavas. In our school at
>|Dallas, the students are learning English and Sanskrit, and
>|through these two languages they are studying all our books,
>| such as Srimad-Bhagavatam, Bhagavad-gita As It Is and The
>|Nectar of Devotion. It is a mistake to educate every
>|student as a technologist. There must be a group of
>|students who become brahmanas. Without brahmanas who study
>|the Vedic literature, human society will be entirely
>|chaotic.
2503|Adi 17.254
2504|TEXT 254
2505|TEXT
2506|suni' krodha kaila saba paduyara gana
2507|sabe meli' kare tabe prabhura nindana
2508|SYNONYMS
2509|suni'-hearing; krodha-angry; kaila-became; saba-all;
>|paduyara-of students; gana-the groups; sabe-all; meli'-
>|joining together ; kare-do; tabe-then; prabhura-of
>|the Lord; nindana-accusation.
2510|TRANSLATION
2511|Hearing of the incident, all the students became greatly
>|angry and joined together in criticizing the Lord.
2512|Adi 17.255
2513|TEXT 255
2514|TEXT
2515|saba desa bhrasta kaila ekala nimani
2516|brahmana marite cahe, dharma-bhaya nai
2517|SYNONYMS
2518|saba-all; desa-countries; bhrasta-spoiled; kaila-has; ekala-
>|alone; nimani-Nimai Pandita; brahmana-a caste brahmana;
>|marite-to strike; cahe-He wants; dharma-of religious
>|principles; bhaya-fear; nai-there is not.
2519|TRANSLATION
2520|"Nimai Pandita alone has spoiled the entire country," they
>|accused. "He wants to strike a caste brahmana. He has no
>|fear of religious principles.
2521|PURPORT
2522|In those days also, the caste brahmanas were very proud.
>|They were not prepared to accept chastisement even from a
>|teacher or spiritual master.
2523|Adi 17.256
2524|TEXT 256
2525|TEXT
2526|punah yadi aiche kare mariba tahare
2527|kon va manusa haya, ki karite pare
2528|SYNONYMS
2529|punah-again; yadi-if; aiche-like that; kare-He does; mariba-
>|we shall strike; tahare-Him; kon-who; va-or; manusa-the man;
>| haya-is; ki-what; karite-to do; pare-He is able.
2530|TRANSLATION
2531|"If He again performs such an atrocious act, certainly we
>|shall retaliate and strike Him in turn. What kind of
>|important person is He, that He can check us in this way?"
2532|Adi 17.257
2533|TEXT 257
2534|TEXT
2535|prabhura nindaya sabara buddhi haila nasa
2536|supathita vidya karao na haya prakasa
2537|SYNONYMS
2538|prabhura-of the Lord; nindaya-in accusation; sabara-of
>|everyone; buddhi-the intelligence; haila-became; nasa-
>|spoiled; su-pathita-well-studied; vidya-knowledge; karao-
>|everyone's; na-does not; haya-become; prakasa-manifest.
2539|TRANSLATION
2540|When all the students thus resolved, criticizing Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu, their intelligence was spoiled. Thus
>|although they were learned scholars, because of this
>|offense the essence of knowledge was not manifested in them.
2541|PURPORT
2542|In the Bhagavad-gita it is said, mayayapahrta-jnana asuram
>|bhavam asritah: when one becomes inimical to the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, adopting an atheistic attitude (
>|asuram bhavam), even if one is a learned scholar the
>|essence of knowledge does not become manifested in him; in
>|other words, the essence of his knowledge is stolen by the
>|illusory energy of the Lord. In this connection Sri
>|Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura quotes a mantra from the
>|Svetasvatara Upanisad (6.23):
2543|yasya deve para bhaktir yatha deve tatha gurau
2544|tasyaite kathita hy arthah prakasante mahatmanah
2545| [SU 6 . 23]
2546|The purport of this verse is that one who is
>|unflinchingly devoted to the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
>| Visnu, and similarly devoted to the spiritual master, with
>|no ulterior motive, becomes a master of all knowledge. In
>|the heart of such a devotee, the real essence of the Vedic
>|knowledge becomes manifested. This essence is nothing but
>|surrender unto the Supreme Personality of Godhead (vedais
>|ca sarvair aham eva vedyah [Bg. 15.15]). Only unto one who
>|fully surrenders to the spiritual master and the Supreme
>|Lord does the essence of Vedic knowledge become manifested,
>|not to anyone else. This same principle is emphasized by
>|Sri Prahlada Maharaja in Srimad-Bhagavatam (7.5.24):
2547|iti pumsarpita visnau bhaktis cen nava
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|
>|-laksana
>|
2548|kriyate bhagavaty addha tan manye 'dhitam uttamam
2549|"A person who directly applies these nine
>|principles [hearing, chanting, remembering, etc.] in the
>|service of the Lord is to be understood as a greatly
>|learned man who has assimilated the Vedic literatures very
>|well, for the goal of studying the Vedic literature is to
>|understand the supremacy of Lord Sri Krsna." Sridhara Svami
>|confirms in his commentary that first one must surrender to
>|the spiritual master; then the process of devotional
>|service will develop. It is not a fact that only one who
>|diligently pursues an academic career can become a devotee.
>|Even with no academic career, if one has full faith in the
>|spiritual master and the Supreme Personality of Godhead, he
>|develops in spiritual life and real knowledge of the Vedas.
>|The example of Maharaja Khatvanga confirms this. One who
>|surrenders is understood to have learned the subject matter
>|of the Vedas very nicely. One who adopts this Vedic process
>|of surrender learns devotional service and is certainly
>|successful. One who is very proud, however, is unable to
>|surrender either to the spiritual master or to the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead. Thus he cannot understand the
>|essence of any Vedic literature. Srimad- Bhagavatam (SB 11.
>|11.18) declares:
2550|sabda-brahmani nisnato na nisnayat pare yadi
2551|sramas tasya srama -phalo hy adhenum iva
>|raksatah
2552|"If
>|
>| one is learned in
>| the Vedic literature but
>|
>|
>|
>|
>| is not a
>|devotee
>|
>|
>|
>| of Lord Visnu , his
>|work is a
>|
>|useless waste of labor
>|,
>|just like the keeping
>| of a
>| cow that does not
>| give milk. "
2553|Anyone who does not follow the surrendering process but is
>|simply interested in an academic career cannot make any
>|advancement. His profit is only his labor for nothing. If
>|one is expert in the study of the Vedas but does not
>|surrender to a spiritual master or Visnu, all his
>|cultivation of knowledge is but a waste of time and labor.
2554|Adi 17.258
2555|TEXT 258
2556|TEXT
2557|tathapi dambhika paduya namra nahi haya
2558|yahan tahan prabhura ninda hasi' se karaya
2559|SYNONYMS
2560|tathapi-still; dambhika-proud; paduya-students; namra-
>|submissive; nahi-not; haya-become; yahan-any where; tahan-
>|everywhere; prabhura-of the Lord; ninda-accusation; hasi'-
>|laughing; se-they; karaya-do.
2561|TRANSLATION
2562|But the proud student community did not become submissive.
>|On the contrary, the students spoke of the incident
>|anywhere and everywhere. In a laughing manner they
>|criticized the Lord.
2563|Adi 17.259
2564|TEXT 259
2565|TEXT
2566|sarva-jna gosani jani' sabara durgati
2567|ghare vasi' cinte ta'-sabara avyahati
2568|SYNONYMS
2569|sarva-jna-all-knowing; gosani-Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu;
>|jani'-knowing; sabara-of all of them; durgati-degradation;
>|ghare-at home; vasi'-sitting; cinte-contemplates; ta'-of
>|them; sabara-of all; avyahati-the rescue.
2570|TRANSLATION
2571|Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, being omniscient, could
>|understand the degradation of these students. Thus He sat
>|at home, contemplating how to rescue them.
2572|Adi 17.260
2573|TEXT 260
2574|TEXT
2575|yata adhyapaka, ara tanra sisya-gana
2576|dharmi, karmi, tapo-nistha, nindaka, durjana
2577|SYNONYMS
2578|yata-all; adhyapaka-professors; ara-and; tanra-their; sisya-
>|gana-students; dharmi-followers of religious ritualistic
>|ceremonies; karmi-performers of fruitive activities; tapah-
>|nistha-performers of austerities; nindaka-blasphemers;
>|durjana-rogues.
2579|TRANSLATION
2580|"All the so-called professors and scientists and their
>|students generally follow the regulative principles of
>|religion, fruitive activities and austerities," the Lord
>|thought, "yet at the same time they are blasphemers and
>|rogues.
2581|PURPORT
2582|Here is a depiction of materialists who have no knowledge
>|of devotional service. They may be very religious and may
>|work very systematically or perform austerities and
>|penances, but if they blaspheme the Supreme Personality of
>|Godhead they are nothing but rogues. This is confirmed in
>|the Hari-bhakti-sudhodaya (3.11):
2583|bhagavad-bhakti-hinasya jatih sastram japas tapah
2584|apranasyaiva dehasya mandanam loka -ranjanam
2585|If they are without knowledge of devotional service to the
>|Lord, then great nationalism, fruitive, political or social
>|work, science or philosophy are all simply like costly
>|garments decorating a dead body. The only offense of
>|persons adhering to these principles is that they are not
>|devotees; they are always blasphemous toward the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead and His devotees.
2586|Adi 17.261
2587|TEXT 261
2588|TEXT
2589|ei saba mora ninda-aparadha haite
2590|ami na laoyaile bhakti, na pare la-ite
2591|SYNONYMS
2592|ei saba-all of them; mora-of Me; ninda-blasphemy; aparadha-
>|offense; haite-from; ami-I; na-not; laoyaile-if causing
>|them to take; bhakti-devotional service; na-not; pare-able;
>|la-ite-to take.
2593|TRANSLATION
2594|"If I do not induce them to take to devotional service,
>|because of committing the offense of blasphemy none of
>|these people will be able to take to it.
2595|Adi 17.262
2596|TEXT 262
2597|TEXT
2598|nistarite ailama ami, haila viparita
2599|e-saba durjanera kaiche ha-ibeka hita
2600|SYNONYMS
2601|nistarite-to deliver; ailama-have come; ami-I; haila-it has
>|become; viparita-just the opposite; e-saba-all these;
>|durjanera-of the rogues; kaiche-how; ha-ibeka-it will be;
>|hita-the benefit.
2602|TRANSLATION
2603|"I have come to deliver all the fallen souls, but now just
>|the opposite has happened. How can these rogues be
>|delivered? How may they be benefited?
2604|Adi 17.263
2605|TEXT 263
2606|TEXT
2607|amake pranati kare, haya papa-ksaya
2608|tabe se ihare bhakti laoyaile laya
2609|SYNONYMS
2610|amake-unto Me; pranati-obeisances; kare-they offer; haya-
>|becomes; papa-ksaya-destruction of sinful reactions; tabe-
>|then; se-they; ihare-unto them; bhakti-devotional service;
>|laoyaile-if causing to take; laya-will take.
2611|TRANSLATION
2612|"If these rogues offer Me obeisances, the reactions of
>|their sinful activities will be nullified. Then, if I
>|induce them, they will take to devotional service.
2613|Adi 17.264
2614|TEXT 264
2615|TEXT
2616|more ninda kare ye, na kare namaskara
2617|e-saba jivere avasya kariba uddhara
2618|SYNONYMS
2619|more-Me; ninda kare-blasphemes; ye-anyone who; na-does not;
>|kare-offer; namaskara-obeisances; e-saba-all these; jivere-
>|living entities; avasya-certainly; kariba-I shall do;
>|uddhara-deliverance.
2620|TRANSLATION
2621|"I must certainly deliver all these fallen souls who
>|blaspheme Me and do not offer Me obeisances.
2622|Adi 17.265
2623|TEXT 265
2624|TEXT
2625|ataeva avasya ami sannyasa kariba
2626|sannyasi-buddhye more pranata ha-iba
2627|SYNONYMS
2628|ataeva-therefore; avasya-certainly; ami-I; sannyasa-the
>|renounced order of life; kariba-shall accept; sannyasi-
>|buddhye-by thinking of Me as a sannyasi; more-unto Me;
>|pranata-bow down; ha-iba-they shall do.
2629|TRANSLATION
2630|"I shall accept the sannyasa order of life, for thus people
>|will offer Me their obeisances, thinking of Me as a member
>|of the renounced order.
2631|PURPORT
2632|Among the members of the varnasrama institution's social
>|orders (brahmana, ksatriya, vaisya and sudra), the brahmana
>|is considered the foremost, for he is the teacher and
>|spiritual master of all the other varnas. Similarly, among
>|the spiritual orders (brahmacarya, grhastha, vanaprastha
>|and sannyasa), the sannyasa order is the most elevated.
>|Therefore a sannyasi is the spiritual master of all the
>|varnas and asramas, and a brahmana is also expected to
>|offer obeisances to a sannyasi. Unfortunately, however,
>|caste brahmanas do not offer obeisances to a Vaisnava
>|sannyasi. They are so proud that they do not offer
>|obeisances even to Indian sannyasis, what to speak of
>|European and American sannyasis. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu,
>|however, expected that even the caste brahmanas would offer
>|respectful obeisances to a sannyasi because five hundred
>|years ago the social custom was to offer obeisances
>|immediately to any sannyasi, known or unknown.
2633|The sannyasis of the Krsna consciousness movement are bona
>|fide. All the students of the Krsna consciousness movement
>|have undergone the regular process of initiation. As
>|enjoined in the Hari-bhakti-vilasa by Sanatana Gosvami,
>|tatha diksa-vidhanena dvijatvam jayate nrnam: by the
>|regular process of initiation, any man can become a
>|brahmana. Thus in the beginning the students of our Krsna
>|consciousness movement agree to live with devotees, and
>|gradually, having given up four prohibited activities-
>|illicit sex, gambling, meat-eating and intoxication-they
>|become advanced in the activities of spiritual life. When
>|one is found to be regularly following these principles, he
>|is given the first initiation (hari-nama), and he regularly
>|chants at least sixteen rounds a day. Then, after six
>|months or a year, he is initiated for the second time and
>|given the sacred thread with the regular sacrifice and
>|rituals. After some time, when he advances still further
>|and is willing to give up this material world, he is given
>|the sannyasa order. At that time he receives the title
>|svami or gosvami, both of which mean "master of the senses."
>| Unfortunately, debauched so-called brahmanas in India
>|neither offer them respect nor accept them as bona fide
>|sannyasis. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu expected the so-called
>|brahmanas to offer respect to such Vaisnava sannyasis.
>|Nevertheless, it does not matter whether they offer respect,
>| nor whether they accept these sannyasis as bona fide, for
>|the sastra describes punishment for such disobedient so-
>|called brahmanas. The sastric injunction declares:
2634|devata-pratimam drstva yatim caiva tridandinam
2635|namaskaram na kuryad yah prayascittiyate narah
2636|"One who does not offer respect to the Supreme Personality
>|of Godhead, to His Deity in the temple or to a tridandi
>|sannyasi must undergo prayascitta [atonement]." If one does
>|not offer obeisances to such a sannyasi, the prescribed
>|prayascitta is to fast for one day.
2637|Adi 17.266
2638|TEXT 266
2639|TEXT
2640|pranatite ha'be ihara aparadha ksaya
2641|nirmala hrdaye bhakti karaiba udaya
2642|SYNONYMS
2643|pranatite-by offering obeisances; ha'be-there will be;
>|ihara-of such offenders; aparadha-the offenses; ksaya-
>|destruction; nirmala-pure; hrdaye-in the heart; bhakti-
>|devotional service; karaiba-I shall cause; udaya-the rising.
2644|TRANSLATION
2645|"Offering obeisances will relieve them of all the reactions
>|to their offenses. Then, by My grace, devotional service [
>|bhakti] will awaken in their pure hearts.
2646|PURPORT
2647|According to the Vedic injunctions, only a brahmana may be
>|offered sannyasa. The Sankara-sampradaya (ekadanda-sannyasa-
>|sampradaya) awards the sannyasa order only to caste
>|brahmanas, or born brahmanas, but in the Vaisnava system
>|even one not born in a brahmana family may be made a
>|brahmana according to the direction of the Hari-bhakti-
>|vilasa (tatha diksa-vidhanena dvijatvam jayate nrnam). Any
>|person from any part of the world may be made a brahmana by
>|the regular process of initiation, and when he follows
>|brahminical behavior, observing the principle of abstaining
>|from intoxication, illicit sex, meat-eating and gambling,
>|he may be offered sannyasa. All the sannyasis in the Krsna
>|consciousness movement, who are preaching all over the
>|world, are regular brahmana-sannyasis. Thus the so-called
>|caste brahmanas should not object to offering them
>|respectful obeisances. By offering such obeisances, as
>|recommended by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, they will diminish
>|their offenses and automatically awaken to their natural
>|position of devotional service. As it is said, nitya-siddha
>|krsna-prema sadhya kabhu naya: [Cc. madhya 22.107] krsna-
>|prema can be awakened in a purified heart. The more we
>|offer obeisances to sannyasis, especially Vaisnava
>|sannyasis, the more we diminish our offenses and purify our
>|hearts. Only in a purified heart can krsna-prema awaken.
>|This is the process of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's cult, the
>|Krsna consciousness movement.
2648|Adi 17.267
2649|TEXT 267
2650|TEXT
2651|e-saba pasandira tabe ha-ibe nistara
2652|ara kona upaya nahi, ei yukti sara
2653|SYNONYMS
2654|e-saba-all these; pasandira-of the demons; tabe-then; ha-
>|ibe-there will be; nistara-deliverance; ara-alternative;
>|kona-some; upaya-means; nahi-there is not; ei-this; yukti-
>|of the argument; sara-essence.
2655|TRANSLATION
2656|"All the unfaithful rogues of this world can be delivered
>|by this process. There is no alternative. This is the
>|essence of the argument."
2657|Adi 17.268
2658|TEXT 268
2659|TEXT
2660|ei drdha yukti kari' prabhu ache ghare
2661|kesava bharati aila nadiya-nagare
2662|SYNONYMS
2663|ei-this; drdha-firm; yukti-consideration; kari'-making;
>|prabhu-the Lord; ache-was; ghare-in His home; kesava
>|bharati-Kesava Bharati; aila-came; nadiya-
>|nagare-to the town of Nadia.
2664|TRANSLATION
2665|After coming to this firm conclusion, the Lord continued to
>|stay at home. In the meantime Kesava Bharati came to the
>|town of Nadia.
2666|Adi 17.269
2667|TEXT 269
2668|TEXT
2669|prabhu tanre namaskari' kaila nimantrana
2670|bhiksa karaiya tanre kaila nivedana
2671|SYNONYMS
2672|prabhu-the Lord; tanre-to him; namaskari'-offering
>|obeisances; kaila-did; nimantrana-invitation; bhiksa-alms;
>|karaiya-giving; tanre-to him; kaila-submitted; nivedana-His
>|prayer.
2673|TRANSLATION
2674|The Lord offered him respectful obeisances and invited him
>|to His house. After feeding him sumptuously, He submitted
>|to him His petition.
2675|PURPORT
2676|According to the system of Vedic society, whenever an
>|unknown sannyasi comes to a village or town, someone must
>|invite him to take prasadam in his home. Sannyasis
>|generally take prasadam in the house of a brahmana because
>|the brahmana worships the Lord Narayana sila, or salagrama-
>|sila, and therefore there is prasadam that the sannyasi may
>|take. Kesava Bharati accepted the invitation of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu. Thus the Lord had a good opportunity
>|to explain His desire to take sannyasa from him.
2677|Adi 17.270
2678|TEXT 270
2679|TEXT
2680|tumi ta' isvara bata,-saksat narayana
2681|krpa kari' kara mora samsara mocana
2682|SYNONYMS
2683|tumi-you; ta'-certainly; isvara-the Lord; bata-are; saksat-
>|directly; narayana-the Supreme Lord, Narayana; krpa kari'-
>|showing mercy; kara-please do; mora-My; samsara-material
>|life; mocana-deliverance.
2684|TRANSLATION
2685|"Sir, you are directly Narayana. Therefore please be
>|merciful unto Me. Deliver Me from this material bondage."
2686|Adi 17.271
2687|TEXT 271
2688|TEXT
2689|bharati kahena,-tumi isvara, antaryami
2690|ye karaha, se kariba,-svatantra nahi ami
2691|SYNONYMS
2692|bharati kahena-Kesava Bharati replied; tumi-You; isvara-the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead; antaryami-You know
>|everything from within; ye-whatever; karaha-You cause to do;
>| se-that; kariba-I must do; svatantra-independent; nahi-not;
>| ami-I.
2693|TRANSLATION
2694|Kesava Bharati replied to the Lord, "You are the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead, the Supersoul. I must do whatever
>|You cause me to do. I am not independent of You."
2695|Adi 17.272
2696|TEXT 272
2697|TEXT
2698|eta bali' bharati gosani katoyate gela
2699|mahaprabhu taha yai' sannyasa karila
2700|SYNONYMS
2701|eta bali'-saying this; bharati-Kesava Bharati; gosani-the
>|spiritual master; katoyate-to Katwa; gela-went; mahaprabhu-
>|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu; taha-there; yai'-going; sannyasa-
>|the renounced order of life; karila-accepted.
2702|TRANSLATION
2703|After saying this, Kesava Bharati, the spiritual master,
>|went back to his village, Katwa. Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu
>|went there and accepted the renounced order of life [
>|sannyasa].
2704|PURPORT
2705|At the end of His twenty-fourth year, at the end of the
>|fortnight of the waxing moon, Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu left
>|Navadvipa and crossed the river Ganges at a place known as
>|Nidayara-ghata. Then He reached Kantaka-nagara, or Katoya (
>|Katwa), where He accepted ekadanda-sannyasa according to
>|the Sankarite system. Since Kesava Bharati belonged to the
>|Sankarite sect, he could not initiate Caitanya Mahaprabhu
>|into the Vaisnava sannyasa order, whose members carry the
>|tridanda.
2706|Candrasekhara Acarya assisted in the routine ceremonial
>|work of the Lord's acceptance of sannyasa. By the order of
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, kirtana was performed for the
>|entire day, and at the end of the day the Lord shaved off
>|His hair. On the next day He became a regular sannyasi,
>|with one rod (ekadanda). From that day on, His name was Sri
>|Krsna Caitanya. Before that, He was known as Nimai Pandita.
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, in the sannyasa order, traveled
>|all over Radhadesa , the region where the Ganges River
>|cannot be seen. Kesava Bharati accompanied Him for some
>|distance.
2707|Adi 17.273
2708|TEXT 273
2709|TEXT
2710|sange nityananda, candrasekhara acarya
2711|mukunda-datta,-ei tina kaila sarva karya
2712|SYNONYMS
2713|sange-in His company; nityananda-Nityananda Prabhu;
>|candrasekhara acarya-Candrasekhara Acarya; mukunda-datta-
>|Mukunda Datta; ei tina-these three; kaila-performed; sarva-
>|all; karya-necessary activities.
2714|TRANSLATION
2715|When Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu accepted sannyasa, three
>|personalities were with Him to perform all the necessary
>|activities. They were Nityananda Prabhu, Candrasekhara
>|Acarya and Mukunda Datta.
2716|Adi 17.274
2717|TEXT 274
2718|TEXT
2719|ei adi-lilara kaila sutra ganana
2720|vistari varnila iha dasa vrndavana
2721|SYNONYMS
2722|ei-this; adi-lilara-of the adi-lila (the first portion of
>|Lord Caitanya's pastimes); kaila-made; sutra-synopsis;
>|ganana-enumeration; vistari-elaborately; varnila-described;
>|iha-this; dasa vrndavana-Vrndavana dasa Thakura.
2723|TRANSLATION
2724|Thus I have summarized the incidents of the adi-lila. Srila
>|Vrndavana dasa Thakura has described them elaborately [in
>|his Caitanya-bhagavata].
2725|Adi 17.275
2726|TEXT 275
2727|TEXT
2728|yasoda-nandana haila sacira nandana
2729|catur-vidha bhakta-bhava kare asvadana
2730|SYNONYMS
2731|yasoda-nandana-the son of mother Yasoda; haila-became;
>|sacira-of mother Saci; nandana-the son; catuh-vidha-four
>|kinds of; bhakta-bhava-devotional humors; kare-does;
>|asvadana-tasting.
2732|TRANSLATION
2733|The same Supreme Personality of Godhead who appeared as the
>|son of mother Yasoda has now appeared as the son of mother
>|Saci, relishing four kinds of devotional activities.
2734|PURPORT
2735|Servitude, friendship, parental affection and conjugal love
>|for the Supreme Personality of Godhead are the basis of the
>|four kinds of devotional activities. In santa, the marginal
>|stage of devotional service, there is no activity. But
>|above the santa humor are servitude, friendship, parental
>|affection and conjugal love, which represent the gradual
>|growth of devotional service to higher and higher platforms.
2736|Adi 17.276
2737|TEXT 276
2738|TEXT
2739|sva-madhurya radha-prema-rasa asvadite
2740|radha-bhava angi kariyache bhala-mate
2741|SYNONYMS
2742|sva-madhurya-His own conjugal love; radha-prema-rasa-the
>|mellow of the loving affairs between Radharani and Krsna;
>|asvadite-to taste; radha-bhava-the mood of Srimati
>|Radharani; angi kariyache-He accepted; bhala-mate-very well.
2743|TRANSLATION
2744|To taste the mellows of Srimati Radharani's loving affairs
>|in Her relationship with Krsna, and to understand the
>|reservoir of pleasure in Krsna, Krsna Himself, as Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu, accepted the mood of Radharani.
2745|PURPORT
2746|In this connection Srila Bhaktisiddhanta Sarasvati Thakura
>|writes in his Anubhasya, "Sri Gaurasundara is Krsna Himself
>|with the attitude of Srimati Radharani. Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu never gave up the attitude of the gopis. He
>|remained everlastingly predominated by Krsna and never
>|accepted the part of the predominator by imitating conjugal
>|love with an ordinary woman, as sahajiyas generally do. He
>|never placed Himself in the position of a debauchee. Lusty
>|materialists like the members of the sahajiya-sampradaya
>|hanker after women, even others' wives. But when they try
>|to ascribe the responsibility for their lusty activities to
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, they become offenders to Svarupa
>|Damodara and Srila Vrndavana dasa Thakura. In Sri Caitanya-
>|bhagavata, Adi-khanda, Chapter Fifteen, it is said:
2747|sabe para-strira prati nahi parihasa
2748|stri dekhi' dure prabhu hayena eka-pasa
2749|'Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu never even joked with others'
>|wives. As soon as He saw a woman coming, He would
>|immediately give her ample room to pass without talking.'
>|He was extremely strict regarding the association of women.
>|The sahajiyas, however, pose as followers of Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu although they indulge in lusty affairs with
>|women. In His youth Lord Caitanya was very humorous with
>|everyone, but He never joked with any woman, nor in this
>|incarnation did He talk about women. The gauranga-nagari
>|party is not approved by Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu or
>|Vrndavana dasa Thakura. Even though one may offer all kinds
>|of prayers to Caitanya Mahaprabhu, one should strictly
>|avoid worshiping Him as the Gauranga Nagara. The personal
>|behavior of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and the verses written
>|by Sri Vrndavana dasa Thakura have completely repudiated
>|the lusty desires of the gauranga-nagaris."
2750|Adi 17.277
2751|TEXT 277
2752|TEXT
2753|gopi-bhava yate prabhu dhariyache ekanta
2754|vrajendra-nandane mane apanara kanta
2755|SYNONYMS
2756|gopi-bhava-the mood of the gopis; yate-in which; prabhu-the
>|Lord; dhariyache-accepted; ekanta-positively; vrajendra-
>|nandane-Lord Krsna; mane-they accept; apanara-own; kanta-
>|lover.
2757|TRANSLATION
2758|Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu accepted the mood of the gopis,
>|who accept Vrajendranandana, Sri Krsna, as their lover.
2759|Adi 17.278
2760|TEXT 278
2761|TEXT
2762|gopika-bhavera ei sudrdha niscaya
2763|vrajendra-nandana vina anyatra na haya
2764|SYNONYMS
2765|gopika-bhavera-of the ecstasy of the gopis; ei-this;
>|sudrdha-firm; niscaya-confirmation; vrajendra-nandana-Lord
>|Sri Krsna; vina-without; anyatra-anyone else; na-not; haya-
>|is possible.
2766|TRANSLATION
2767|It is firmly concluded that the ecstatic mood of the
>|gopis is possible only before Krsna, and no one else.
2768|Adi 17.279
2769|TEXT 279
2770|TEXT
2771|syamasundara, sikhipiccha-gunja-vibhusana
2772|gopa-vesa, tri-bhangima, murali-vadana
2773|SYNONYMS
2774|syama-sundara-Lord Krsna, who has a bluish color; sikhi-
>|piccha-with a peacock feather on the head; gunja-a garland
>|of gunja (small berries or conchshells); vibhusana-
>|decorations; gopa-vesa-with the dress of a cowherd boy; tri-
>|bhangima-curved in three places; murali-vadana-holding a
>|flute to His mouth.
2775|TRANSLATION
2776|He has a bluish complexion, a peacock feather on His head,
>|a gunja garland and the decorations of a cowherd boy. His
>|body is curved in three places, and He holds a flute to His
>|mouth.
2777|Adi 17.280
2778|TEXT 280
2779|TEXT
2780|iha chadi' krsna yadi haya anyakara
2781|gopikara bhava nahi yaya nikata tahara
2782|SYNONYMS
2783|iha-this; chadi'-giving up; krsna-Krsna; yadi-if; haya-
>|takes; anya-akara-another form; gopikara-of the gopis;
>|bhava-the ecstasy; nahi-does not; yaya-arise; nikata-near;
>|tahara-that (form).
2784|TRANSLATION
2785|If Lord Krsna gives up this original form and assumes
>|another Visnu form, nearness to Him cannot invoke the
>|ecstatic mood of the gopis.
2786|Adi 17.281
2787|TEXT 281
2788|TEXT
2789|gopinam pasupendra-nandana-juso bhavasya kas tam krti
2790|vijnatum ksamate duruha-padavi-sancarinah prakriyam
2791|aviskurvati vaisnavim api tanum tasmin bhujair jisnubhir
2792|yasam hanta caturbhir adbhuta-rucim ragodayah kuncati
2793|SYNONYMS
2794|gopinam-of the gopis; pasupa-indra-nandana-jusah-of the
>|service of the son of Vraja's King, Maharaja Nanda;
>|bhavasya-ecstatic; kah-what; tam-that; krti-learned man;
>|vijnatum-to understand; ksamate-is able; duruha-very
>|difficult to understand; padavi-the position; sancarinah-
>|which provokes; prakriyam-activity; aviskurvati-He
>|manifests; vaisnavim-of Visnu; api-certainly; tanum-the
>|body; tasmin-in that; bhujaih-with arms; jisnubhih-very
>|beautiful; yasam-of whom (the gopis); hanta-alas; caturbhih-
>|four; adbhuta-wonderfully; rucim-beautiful; raga-udayah-the
>|evoking of ecstatic feelings; kuncati-cripples.
2795|TRANSLATION
2796|"Once Lord Sri Krsna playfully manifested Himself as
>|Narayana, with four victorious hands and a very beautiful
>|form. When the gopis saw this exalted form, however, their
>|ecstatic feelings were crippled. Even a learned scholar,
>|therefore, cannot understand the gopis' ecstatic feelings,
>|which are firmly fixed upon the original form of Lord Krsna
>|as the son of Nanda Maharaja. The wonderful feelings of the
>|gopis in ecstatic parama-rasa with Krsna constitute the
>|greatest mystery in spiritual life. "
2797|PURPORT
2798|This is a quotation from the Lalita-madhava (6.54), by
>|Srila Rupa Gosvami.
2799|Adi 17.282
2800|TEXT 282
2801|TEXT
2802|vasanta-kale rasa-lila kare govardhane
2803|antardhana kaila sanketa kari' radha-sane
2804|SYNONYMS
2805|vasanta-kale-during the season of spring; rasa-lila-the
>|rasa dance; kare-does; govardhane-near the Govardhana Hill;
>|antardhana-disappearance; kaila-did; sanketa-indication;
>|kari'-making; radha-sane-with Radharani.
2806|TRANSLATION
2807|During the season of springtime, when the rasa dance was
>|going on, suddenly Krsna disappeared from the scene,
>|indicating that He wanted to be alone with Srimati
>|Radharani.
2808|Adi 17.283
2809|TEXT 283
2810|TEXT
2811|nibhrta-nikunje vasi' dekhe radhara bata
2812|anvesite aila tahan gopikara thata
2813|SYNONYMS
2814|nibhrta-solitary; nikunje-in a bush; vasi'-sitting; dekhe-
>|waiting to see; radhara-of Srimati Radharani; bata-the
>|passing; anvesite-while searching; aila-came; tahan-there;
>|gopikara-of the gopis; thata-the phalanx.
2815|TRANSLATION
2816|Krsna was sitting in a solitary bush, waiting for Srimati
>|Radharani to pass by. But while He was searching, the gopis
>|arrived there, like a phalanx of soldiers.
2817|Adi 17.284
2818|TEXT 284
2819|TEXT
2820|dura haite krsne dekhi' bale gopi-gana
2821|"ei dekha kunjera bhitara vrajendra-nandana"
2822|SYNONYMS
2823|dura haite-from a distance; krsne-unto Krsna; dekhi'-seeing;
>| bale-said; gopi-gana-all the gopis; ei dekha-just see here;
>| kunjera-the bush; bhitara-within; vrajendra-nandana-the
>|son of Nanda Maharaja.
2824|TRANSLATION
2825|"Just see!" the gopis said, seeing Krsna from a distant
>|place. "Here within a bush is Krsna, the son of Nanda
>|Maharaja."
2826|Adi 17.285
2827|TEXT 285
2828|TEXT
2829|gopi-gana dekhi' krsnera ha-ila sadhvasa
2830|lukaite narila, bhaye haila vibasa
2831|SYNONYMS
2832|gopi-gana-all the gopis combined together; dekhi'-seeing;
>|krsnera-of Krsna; ha-ila-there were; sadhvasa-some
>|emotional feelings; lukaite-to hide; narila-was unable;
>|bhaye-out of fear; haila-became; vibasa-motionless.
2833|TRANSLATION
2834|As soon as Krsna saw all the gopis, He was struck with
>|emotion. Thus He could not hide Himself, and out of fear He
>|became motionless.
2835|Adi 17.286
2836|TEXT 286
2837|TEXT
2838|catur-bhuja murti dhari' achena vasiya
2839|krsna dekhi' gopi kahe nikate asiya
2840|SYNONYMS
2841|catur-bhuja-four-armed; murti-form; dhari'-accepting;
>|achena-was; vasiya-sitting; krsna-Lord Krsna; dekhi'-seeing;
>| gopi-the gopis; kahe-say; nikate-nearby; asiya-coming
>|there.
2842|TRANSLATION
2843|Krsna assumed His four-armed Narayana form and sat there.
>|When all the gopis came, they looked at Him and spoke as
>|follows.
2844|Adi 17.287
2845|TEXT 287
2846|TEXT
2847|'ihon krsna nahe, ihon narayana murti'
2848|eta bali' tanre sabhe kare nati-stuti
2849|SYNONYMS
2850|ihon-this; krsna-Lord Krsna; nahe-is not; ihon-this is;
>|narayana-the Supreme Personality of Godhead; murti-the form;
>| eta bali'-saying this; tanre-unto Him; sabhe-all the gopis;
>| kare-make; nati-stuti-obeisances and prayers.
2851|TRANSLATION
2852|"He is not Krsna! He is the Supreme Personality of Godhead,
>|Narayana." After saying this, they offered obeisances and
>|the following respectful prayers.
2853|Adi 17.288
2854|TEXT 288
2855|TEXT
2856|"namo narayana, deva karaha prasada
2857|krsna-sanga deha' mora ghucaha visada"
2858|SYNONYMS
2859|namah narayana-all respects to Narayana; deva-the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; karaha-kindly give; prasada-Your
>|mercy; krsna-sanga-association with Krsna; deha'-giving;
>|mora-our; ghucaha-please diminish; visada-lamentation.
2860|TRANSLATION
2861|"O Lord Narayana, we offer our respectful obeisances unto
>|You. Kindly be merciful to us. Give us the association of
>|Krsna and thus vanquish our lamentation."
2862|PURPORT
2863|The gopis were not made happy even by seeing the four-armed
>|form of Narayana. Yet they offered their respects to the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead and begged from Him the
>|benediction of achieving the association of Krsna. Such is
>|the ecstatic feeling of the gopis.
2864|Adi 17.289
2865|TEXT 289
2866|TEXT
2867|eta bali namaskari' gela gopi-gana
2868|hena-kale radha asi' dila darasana
2869|SYNONYMS
2870|eta bali-saying this; namaskari'-offering obeisances; gela-
>|went away; gopi-gana-all the gopis; hena-kale-at this time;
>|radha-Srimati Radharani; asi'-coming there; dila-gave;
>|darasana-audience.
2871|TRANSLATION
2872|After saying this and offering obeisances, all the gopis
>|dispersed. Then Srimati Radharani came and appeared before
>|Lord Krsna.
2873|Adi 17.290
2874|TEXT 290
2875|TEXT
2876|radha dekhi' krsna tanre hasya karite
2877|sei catur-bhuja murti cahena rakhite
2878|SYNONYMS
2879|radha-Srimati Radharani; dekhi'-seeing; krsna-Lord Krsna;
>|tanre-unto Her; hasya-joking; karite-to do; sei-that; catur-
>|bhuja-four-armed; murti-form; cahena-wanted; rakhite-to
>|keep.
2880|TRANSLATION
2881|When Lord Krsna saw Radharani, He wanted to maintain the
>|four-armed form to joke with Her.
2882|Adi 17.291
2883|TEXT 291
2884|TEXT
2885|lukaila dui bhuja radhara agrete
2886|bahu yatna kaila krsna, narila rakhite
2887|SYNONYMS
2888|lukaila-He hid; dui-two; bhuja-arms; radhara-of Srimati
>|Radharani; agrete-in front; bahu-much; yatna-endeavor;
>|kaila-did; krsna-Lord Krsna; narila-was unable; rakhite-to
>|keep.
2889|TRANSLATION
2890|In front of Srimati Radharani, Sri Krsna had to hide the
>|two extra arms. He tried His best to keep four arms before
>|Her, but He was completely unable to do so.
2891|Adi 17.292
2892|TEXT 292
2893|TEXT
2894|radhara visuddha-bhavera acintya prabhava
2895|ye krsnere karaila dvi-bhuja-svabhava
2896|SYNONYMS
2897|radhara-of Srimati Radharani; visuddha-purified; bhavera-of
>|the ecstasy; acintya-inconceivable; prabhava-influence; ye-
>|which; krsnere-unto Lord Krsna; karaila-forced; dvi-bhuja-
>|two-armed; svabhava-original form.
2898|TRANSLATION
2899|The influence of Radharani's pure ecstasy is so
>|inconceivably great that it forced Krsna to come to His
>|original two-armed form.
2900|Adi 17.293
2901|TEXT 293
2902|TEXT
2903|rasarambha-vidhau niliya vasata kunje mrgaksi-ganair
2904|drstam gopayitum svam uddhura-dhiya ya susthu sandarsita
2905|radhayah pranayasya hanta mahima yasya sriya raksitum
2906|sa sakya prabhavisnunapi harina nasic catur-bahuta
2907|SYNONYMS
2908|rasa-arambha-vidhau-in the matter of beginning the rasa
>|dance; niliya-having hidden; vasata-sitting; kunje-in a
>|grove; mrga-aksi-ganaih-by the gopis, who had eyes
>|resembling those of deer; drstam-being seen; gopayitum-to
>|hide; svam-Himself; uddhura-dhiya-by first-class
>|intelligence; ya-which; susthu-perfectly; sandarsita-
>|exhibited; radhayah-of Srimati Radharani; pranayasya-of the
>|love; hanta-just see; mahima-the glory; yasya-of which;
>|sriya-the opulence; raksitum-to protect that; sa-that;
>|sakya-able; prabhavisnuna-by Krsna; api-even; harina-by the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead; na-not; asit-was; catuh-
>|bahuta-four-armed form.
2909|TRANSLATION
2910|"Prior to the rasa dance, Lord Krsna hid Himself in a grove
>|just to have fun. When the gopis came, their eyes
>|resembling those of deer, by His sharp intelligence He
>|exhibited His beautiful four-armed form to hide Himself.
>|But when Srimati Radharani came there, Krsna could not
>|maintain His four arms in Her presence. This is the
>|wonderful glory of Her love."
2911|PURPORT
2912|This is a quotation from the Ujjvala-nilamani (Nayika-bheda
>|7), by Srila Rupa Gosvami.
2913|Adi 17.294
2914|TEXT 294
2915|TEXT
2916|sei vrajesvara-ihan jagannatha pita
2917|sei vrajesvari-ihan sacidevi mata
2918|SYNONYMS
2919|sei-that; vrajesvara-the King of Vraja; ihan-now;
>|jagannatha-Jagannatha Misra; pita-the father of Lord
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; sei-that; vrajesvari-Queen of Vraja;
>|ihan-now; sacidevi-Sacidevi; mata-the mother of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
2920|TRANSLATION
2921|Father Nanda, the King of Vrajabhumi, is now Jagannatha
>|Misra, the father of Caitanya Mahaprabhu. And mother Yasoda,
>| the Queen of Vrajabhumi, is now Sacidevi, Lord Caitanya's
>|mother.
2922|Adi 17.295
2923|TEXT 295
2924|TEXT
2925|sei nanda-suta-ihan caitanya-gosani
2926|sei baladeva-ihan nityananda bhai
2927|SYNONYMS
2928|sei nanda-suta-the same son of Nanda Maharaja; ihan-now;
>|caitanya-gosani-Caitanya Mahaprabhu; sei baladeva-the
>|selfsame Baladeva; ihan-now; nityananda bhai-Nityananda
>|Prabhu, the brother of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
2929|TRANSLATION
2930|The former son of Nanda Maharaja is now Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, and the former Baladeva, Krsna's brother, is
>|now Nityananda Prabhu, the brother of Lord Caitanya.
2931|Adi 17.296
2932|TEXT 296
2933|TEXT
2934|vatsalya, dasya, sakhya-tina bhavamaya
2935|sei nityananda-krsna-caitanya-sahaya
2936|SYNONYMS
2937|vatsalya-paternity; dasya-servitude; sakhya-fraternity;
>|tina-three; bhava-maya-emotional ecstasies; sei-that;
>|nityananda-Nityananda Prabhu; krsna-caitanya-of Lord
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; sahaya-the assistant.
2938|TRANSLATION
2939|Sri Nityananda Prabhu always feels the ecstatic emotions of
>|paternity, servitude and friendship. He always assists Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu in that way.
2940|Adi 17.297
2941|TEXT 297
2942|TEXT
2943|prema-bhakti diya tenho bhasa'la jagate
2944|tanra caritra loke na pare bujhite
2945|SYNONYMS
2946|prema-bhakti-devotional service; diya-giving; tenho-Lord
>|Nityananda Prabhu; bhasa'la-overflooded; jagate-in the
>|world; tanra-His; caritra-character; loke-people; na-not;
>|pare-able; bujhite-to understand.
2947|TRANSLATION
2948|Sri Nityananda Prabhu overflooded the entire world by
>|distributing transcendental loving service. No one can
>|understand His character and activities.
2949|Adi 17.298
2950|TEXT 298
2951|TEXT
2952|advaita-acarya-gosani bhakta-avatara
2953|krsna avatariya kaila bhaktira pracara
2954|SYNONYMS
2955|advaita-acarya-Sri Advaita Prabhu; gosani-spiritual master;
>|bhakta-avatara-the incarnation of a devotee; krsna-the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead; avatariya-descending; kaila-
>|did; bhaktira-of devotional service; pracara-propagation.
2956|TRANSLATION
2957|Srila Advaita Acarya Prabhu appeared as an incarnation of a
>|devotee. He is in the category of Krsna, but He descended
>|to this earth to propagate devotional service.
2958|Adi 17.299
2959|TEXT 299
2960|TEXT
2961|sakhya, dasya,-dui bhava sahaja tanhara
2962|kabhu prabhu karena tanre guru-vyavahara
2963|SYNONYMS
2964|sakhya-fraternity; dasya-servitude; dui-two; bhava-
>|ecstasies; sahaja-natural; tanhara-His; kabhu-sometimes;
>|prabhu-Lord Caitanya; karena-does; tanre-to Him; guru-of
>|spiritual master; vyavahara-treatment.
2965|TRANSLATION
2966|His natural emotions were always on the platform of
>|fraternity and servitude, but the Lord sometimes treated
>|Him as His spiritual master.
2967|Adi 17.300
2968|TEXT 300
2969|TEXT
2970|srivasadi yata mahaprabhura bhakta-gana
2971|nija nija bhave karena caitanya-sevana
2972|SYNONYMS
2973|srivasa-adi-headed by Srivasa Thakura; yata-all;
>|mahaprabhura-of Caitanya Mahaprabhu; bhakta-gana-devotees;
>|nija nija-in their own respective; bhave-emotions; karena-
>|do; caitanya-sevana-service to Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
2974|TRANSLATION
2975|All the devotees of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, headed by
>|Srivasa Thakura, have their own emotional humors in which
>|they render service unto Him.
2976|Adi 17.301
2977|TEXT 301
2978|TEXT
2979|pandita-gosani adi yanra yei rasa
2980|sei sei rase prabhu hana tanra vasa
2981|SYNONYMS
2982|pandita-gosani-Gadadhara Pandita; adi-headed by; yanra-
>|whose; yei-whatever; rasa-transcendental mellow; sei sei-
>|that respective; rase-by the mellow; prabhu-the Lord; hana-
>|is; tanra-his; vasa-under control.
2983|TRANSLATION
2984|Personal associates like Gadadhara, Svarupa Damodara,
>|Ramananda Raya, and the six Gosvamis (headed by Rupa
>|Gosvami) are all situated in their respective
>|transcendental humors. Thus the Lord submits to various
>|positions in various transcendental mellows.
2985|PURPORT
2986|In verses 296 through 301 the emotional devoted service of
>|Sri Nityananda, Sri Advaita Prabhu and others has been
>|fully described. Describing such individual service, the
>|Gaura-ganoddesa-dipika (11 – 16 ) declares
>|that although Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu appeared as a
>|devotee, He is none other than the son of Nanda Maharaja.
>|Similarly, although Sri Nityananda Prabhu appeared as Lord
>|Caitanya's assistant, He is none other than Baladeva, the
>|carrier of the plow. Advaita Acarya is the incarnation of
>|Sadasiva from the spiritual world. All the devotees headed
>|by Srivasa Thakura are His marginal energy, whereas the
>|devotees headed by Gadadhara Pandita are manifestations of
>|His internal potency.
2987|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu, Advaita Prabhu and Nityananda
>|Prabhu all belong to the visnu-tattva category. Because
>|Lord Caitanya is an ocean of mercy, He is addressed as
>|mahaprabhu, whereas Nityananda and Advaita, being two great
>|personalities who assist Lord Caitanya, are addressed as
>|prabhu. Thus there are two prabhus and one mahaprabhu.
>|Gadadhara Gosvami is a representative of a perfect brahmana
>|spiritual master. Srivasa Thakura represents a perfect
>|brahmana devotee. These five are known as the Panca-tattva.
2988|Adi 17.302
2989|TEXT 302
2990|TEXT
2991|tihan syama,-vamsi-mukha, gopa-vilasi
2992|ihan gaura-kabhu dvija, kabhu ta' sannyasi
2993|SYNONYMS
2994|tihan-in krsna-lila; syama-blackish color; vamsi-mukha-a
>|flute in the mouth; gopa-vilasi-an enjoyer as a cowherd boy;
>| ihan-now; gaura-fair complexion; kabhu-sometimes; dvija-
>|brahmana; kabhu-sometimes; ta'-certainly; sannyasi-in the
>|renounced order of life.
2995|TRANSLATION
2996|In krsna-lila the Lord's complexion is blackish. Holding a
>|flute to His mouth, He enjoys as a cowherd boy. Now the
>|selfsame person has appeared with a fair complexion,
>|sometimes acting as a brahmana and sometimes accepting the
>|renounced order of life.
2997|Adi 17.303
2998|TEXT 303
2999|TEXT
3000|ataeva apane prabhu gopi-bhava dhari'
3001|vrajendra-nandane kahe 'prana-natha' kari'
3002|SYNONYMS
3003|ataeva-therefore; apane-personally; prabhu-the Lord; gopi-
>|bhava-the ecstasy of the gopis; dhari'-accepting; vrajendra-
>|nandane-the son of Nanda Maharaja; kahe-addresses; prana-
>|natha-O Lord of My life (husband); kari'-accepting.
3004|TRANSLATION
3005|Therefore the Lord Himself, accepting the emotional ecstasy
>|of the gopis, now addresses the son of Nanda Maharaja, "O
>|master of My life! O My dear husband!"
3006|Adi 17.304
3007|TEXT 304
3008|TEXT
3009|sei krsna, sei gopi,-parama virodha
3010|acintya caritra prabhura ati sudurbodha
3011|SYNONYMS
3012|sei krsna-that Krsna; sei gopi-that gopi; parama virodha-
>|very contradictory; acintya-inconceivable; caritra-
>|character; prabhura-of the Lord; ati-very ; sudurbodha-
>|difficult to understand.
3013|TRANSLATION
3014|He is Krsna, yet He has accepted the mood of the gopis. How
>|is it so? It is the inconceivable character of the Lord,
>|which is very difficult to understand.
3015|PURPORT
3016|Krsna's accepting the part of the gopis is certainly
>|contradictory according to any mundane calculations, but
>|the Lord, by His inconceivable character, may act like the
>|gopis and feel separation from Krsna, although He is Krsna
>|Himself. Such a contradiction can be reconciled only in the
>|Supreme Personality of Godhead because He has energy that
>|is inconceivable (acintya), which can make possible that
>|which is impossible to do (aghata-ghatana-patiyasi). Such
>|contradictions are very difficult to understand unless a
>|devotee strictly follows the Vaisnava philosophy under the
>|direction of the Gosvamis. Therefore Krsnadasa Kaviraja
>|Gosvami ends every chapter with this verse:
3017|sri-rupa-raghunatha-pade yara asa
3018|caitanya-caritamrta kahe krsnadasa
3019|"Praying at the lotus feet of Sri Rupa and Sri Raghunatha,
>|always desiring their mercy, I, Krsnadasa, narrate Sri
>|Caitanya-caritamrta, following in their footsteps."
3020|In a song by Narottama dasa Thakura it is stated:
3021|rupa-raghunatha-pade ha-ibe akuti
3022|kabe hama bujhaba se yugala-piriti
3023|The conjugal love between Radha and Krsna, which is called
>|yugala-piriti, is not understandable by mundane scholars,
>|artists or poets. It is simply to be understood by devotees
>|who strictly follow in the footsteps of the six Gosvamis.
>|Sometimes so-called artists and poets try to understand the
>|love affairs of Radha and Krsna, and they publish cheap
>|books of poetry and pictures on the subject. Unfortunately,
>|however, they do not understand the transcendental affairs
>|of Radha and Krsna even to the smallest degree. They are
>|simply meddling in a matter in which they are not fit even
>|to enter.
3024|Adi 17.305
3025|TEXT 305
3026|TEXT
3027|ithe tarka kari' keha na kara samsaya
3028|krsnera acintya-sakti ei mata haya
3029|SYNONYMS
3030|ithe-in this matter; tarka kari'-making arguments; keha-
>|someone; na-do not; kara-make; samsaya-doubts; krsnera-of
>|Lord Krsna; acintya-sakti-inconceivable potency; ei-this;
>|mata-the verdict; haya-is.
3031|TRANSLATION
3032|One cannot understand the contradictions in Lord Caitanya's
>|character by putting forward mundane logic and arguments.
>|Consequently one should not maintain doubts in this
>|connection. One should simply try to understand the
>|inconceivable energy of Krsna; otherwise one cannot
>|understand how such contradictions are possible.
3033|Adi 17.306
3034|TEXT 306
3035|TEXT
3036|acintya, adbhuta krsna-caitanya-vihara
3037|citra bhava, citra guna, citra vyavahara
3038|SYNONYMS
3039|acintya-inconceivable; adbhuta-wonderful; krsna-caitanya-of
>|Lord Sri Krsna Caitanya Mahaprabhu; vihara-pastimes; citra-
>|wonderful; bhava-ecstasy; citra-wonderful; guna-qualities;
>|citra-wonderful; vyavahara-behavior.
3040|TRANSLATION
3041|The pastimes of Sri Krsna Caitanya Mahaprabhu are
>|inconceivable and wonderful. His ecstasy is wonderful, His
>|qualities are wonderful, and His behavior is wonderful.
3042|Adi 17.307
3043|TEXT 307
3044|TEXT
3045|tarke iha nahi mane yei duracara
3046|kumbhipake pace, tara nahika nistara
3047|SYNONYMS
3048|tarke-by arguments; iha-this; nahi-not; mane-accepts; yei-
>|anyone who; duracara-debauchee; kumbhi-pake-in the boiling
>|oil of hell; pace-boils; tara-his; nahika-there is not;
>|nistara-deliverance.
3049|TRANSLATION
3050|If one simply adheres to mundane arguments and therefore
>|does not accept this, he will boil in the hell of
>|Kumbhipaka. For him there is no deliverance.
3051|PURPORT
3052|Kumbhipaka, a type of hellish condition, is described in
>|Srimad-Bhagavatam (5.26.13), wherein it is said that a
>|person who cooks living birds and beasts to satisfy his
>|tongue is brought before Yamaraja after death and punished
>|in the Kumbhipaka hell. There he is put into boiling oil
>|called kumbhi-paka, from which there is no deliverance.
>|Kumbhipaka is meant for persons who are unnecessarily
>|envious. Those who are envious of the activities of Sri
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu are punished in that hellish condition.
3053|Adi 17.308
3054|TEXT 308
3055|TEXT
3056|acintyah khalu ye bhava
3057|na tams tarkena yojayet
3058|prakrtibhyah param yac ca
3059|tad acintyasya laksanam
3060|SYNONYMS
3061|acintyah-inconceivable; khalu-certainly; ye-those; bhavah-
>|subject matters; na-not; tan-them; tarkena-by argument;
>|yojayet-one may understand; prakrtibhyah-to material nature;
>| param-transcendental; yat-that which; ca-and; tat-that;
>|acintyasya-of the inconceivable; laksanam-a symptom.
3062|TRANSLATION
3063|"Anything transcendental to material nature is called
>|inconceivable, whereas arguments are all mundane. Since
>|mundane arguments cannot touch transcendental subject
>|matters, one should not try to understand transcendental
>|subjects through mundane arguments."
3064|PURPORT
>|
>|
3065|This verse from the Mahabharata (Bhisma-parva 5.22) is also
>|quoted in the Bhakti-rasamrta-sindhu (2.5.93), by Srila
>|Rupa Gosvami.
3066|Adi 17.309
3067|TEXT 309
3068|TEXT
3069|adbhuta caitanya-lilaya yahara visvasa
3070|sei jana yaya caitanyera pada pasa
3071|SYNONYMS
3072|adbhuta-wonderful; caitanya-lilaya-in the pastimes of Lord
>|Caitanya Mahaprabhu; yahara-anyone whose; visvasa-faith;
>|sei-that; jana-person; yaya-makes progress; caitanyera-of
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; pada-the lotus feet; pasa-near.
3073|TRANSLATION
3074|Only a person who has firm faith in the wonderful pastimes
>|of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu can approach His lotus feet.
3075|Adi 17.310
3076|TEXT 310
3077|TEXT
3078|prasange kahila ei siddhantera sara
3079|iha yei sune, suddha-bhakti haya tara
3080|SYNONYMS
3081|prasange-in the course of discussion; kahila-it was said;
>|ei-this; siddhantera-of the conclusion; sara-the essence;
>|iha-this; yei-anyone who; sune-hears; suddha-bhakti-
>|unalloyed devotional service; haya-becomes; tara-his.
3082|TRANSLATION
3083|In this discourse I have explained the essence of the
>|devotional conclusion. Anyone who hears this develops
>|unalloyed devotional service to the Lord.
3084|Adi 17.311
3085|TEXT 311
3086|TEXT
3087|likhita granthera yadi kari anuvada
3088|tabe se granthera artha paiye asvada
3089|SYNONYMS
3090|likhita-written; granthera-of the scripture; yadi-if; kari-
>|I do; anuvada-repetition; tabe-then; se granthera-of that
>|scripture; artha-the meaning; paiye-I can get; asvada-taste.
3091|TRANSLATION
3092|If I repeat what is already written, I may thus relish the
>|purport of this scripture.
3093|Adi 17.312
3094|TEXT 312
3095|TEXT
3096|dekhi granthe bhagavate vyasera acara
3097|katha kahi' anuvada kare vara vara
3098|SYNONYMS
3099|dekhi-I see; granthe-in the scripture; bhagavate-in Srimad-
>|Bhagavatam; vyasera-of Srila Vyasadeva; acara-behavior;
>|katha-narration; kahi'-describing; anuvada-repetition; kare-
>|he does; vara vara-again and again.
3100|TRANSLATION
3101|We can see in the scripture Srimad-Bhagavatam the conduct
>|of its author, Sri Vyasadeva. After speaking the narration,
>|he repeats it again and again.
3102|PURPORT
3103|At the end of Srimad-Bhagavatam, in the Twelfth Canto, the
>|Twelfth Chapter contains forty-three verses in which Sri
>|Krsna-dvaipayana Vedavyasa recapitulates Srimad-Bhagavatam'
>|s entire subject matter. Sri Krsnadasa Kaviraja Gosvami
>|wants to follow in the footsteps of Sri Vyasadeva by
>|recapitulating the seventeen chapters of Sri Caitanya-
>|caritamrta's Adi-lila.
3104|Adi 17.313
3105|TEXT 313
3106|TEXT
3107|tate adi-lilara kari pariccheda ganana
3108|prathama paricchede kailun 'mangalacarana'
3109|SYNONYMS
3110|tate-therefore; adi-lilara-of the First Canto, known as Adi-
>|lila; kari-I do; pariccheda-chapter; ganana-enumeration;
>|prathama paricchede-in the First Chapter; kailun-I have
>|done; mangala-acarana-invocation of auspiciousness.
3111|TRANSLATION
3112|Therefore I shall enumerate the chapters of the Adi-lila.
>|In the First Chapter I offer obeisances to the spiritual
>|master, for this is the beginning of auspicious writing.
3113|Adi 17.314
3114|TEXT 314
3115|TEXT
3116|dvitiya paricchede 'caitanya-tattva-nirupana'
3117|svayam bhagavan yei vrajendra-nandana
3118|SYNONYMS
3119|dvitiya paricchede-in the Second Chapter; caitanya-tattva-
>|nirupana-description of the truth of Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; svayam-personally; bhagavan-the Supreme
>|Personality of Godhead; yei-who; vrajendra-nandana-the son
>|of Nanda Maharaja.
3120|TRANSLATION
3121|The Second Chapter explains the truth of Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu. He is the Supreme Personality of Godhead, Lord
>|Krsna, the son of Maharaja Nanda.
3122|Adi 17.315
3123|TEXT 315
3124|TEXT
3125|tenho ta' caitanya-krsna-sacira nandana
3126|trtiya paricchede janmera 'samanya' karana
3127|SYNONYMS
3128|tenho-He; ta'-certainly; caitanya-krsna-Krsna with the name
>|of Sri Caitanya; sacira nandana-the son of Sacimata; trtiya
>|paricchede-in the Third Chapter; janmera-of His birth;
>|samanya-general; karana-reason.
3129|TRANSLATION
3130|Sri Krsna Caitanya Mahaprabhu, who is Krsna Himself, has
>|now appeared as the son of mother Saci. The Third Chapter
>|describes the general cause of His appearance.
3131|Adi 17.316
3132|TEXT 316
3133|TEXT
3134|tahin madhye prema-dana-'visesa' karana
3135|yuga-dharma-krsna-nama-prema-pracarana
3136|SYNONYMS
3137|tahin madhye-in that chapter; prema-dana-distribution of
>|love of Godhead; visesa-specific; karana-reason; yuga-
>|dharma-the religion of the millennium; krsna-nama-the holy
>|name of Lord Krsna; prema-love of Godhead; pracarana-
>|propagating.
3138|TRANSLATION
3139|The Third Chapter specifically describes the distribution
>|of love of Godhead. It also describes the religion of the
>|age, which is simply to distribute the holy name of Lord
>|Krsna and propagate the process of loving Him.
3140|Adi 17.317
3141|TEXT 317
3142|TEXT
3143|caturthe kahilun janmera 'mula' prayojana
3144|sva-madhurya-premananda-rasa-asvadana
3145|SYNONYMS
3146|caturthe-in the Fourth Chapter; kahilun-I have described;
>|janmera-of His birth; mula-the real; prayojana-necessity;
>|sva-madhurya-His own transcendental sweetness; prema-ananda-
>|of ecstatic joy from love; rasa-the mellows; asvadana-
>|tasting.
3147|TRANSLATION
3148|The Fourth Chapter describes the main reason for His
>|appearance, which is to taste the mellows of His own
>|transcendental loving service and His own sweetness.
3149|Adi 17.318
3150|TEXT 318
3151|TEXT
3152|pancame 'sri-nityananda'-tattva nirupana
3153|nityananda haila rama rohini-nandana
3154|SYNONYMS
3155|pancame-in the Fifth Chapter; sri-nityananda-of Lord
>|Nityananda Prabhu; tattva-the truth; nirupana-description;
>|nityananda-Lord Nityananda Prabhu; haila-was; rama-Balarama;
>| rohini-nandana-the son of Rohini.
3156|TRANSLATION
3157|The Fifth Chapter describes the truth of Lord Nityananda
>|Prabhu, who is none other than Balarama, the son of Rohini.
3158|Adi 17.319
3159|TEXT 319
3160|TEXT
3161|sastha paricchede 'advaita-tattve'ra vicara
3162|advaita-acarya-maha-visnu-avatara
3163|SYNONYMS
3164|sastha paricchede-in the Sixth Chapter; advaita-of Advaita
>|Acarya; tattvera-of the truth; vicara-consideration;
>|advaita-acarya-Advaita Prabhu; maha-visnu-avatara-
>|incarnation of Maha-Visnu.
3165|TRANSLATION
3166|The Sixth Chapter considers the truth of Advaita Acarya. He
>|is an incarnation of Maha-Visnu.
3167|Adi 17.320
3168|TEXT 320
3169|TEXT
3170|saptama paricchede 'panca-tattve'ra akhyana
3171|panca-tattva mili' yaiche kaila prema-dana
3172|SYNONYMS
3173|saptama paricchede-in the Seventh Chapter; panca-tattvera-
>|of the five tattvas (truths); akhyana-the elaboration;
>|panca-tattva-the five tattvas; mili'-combining together;
>|yaiche-in what way; kaila-did; prema-dana-distribution of
>|love of Godhead.
3174|TRANSLATION
3175|The Seventh Chapter describes the Panca-tattva-Sri Caitanya,
>| Prabhu Nityananda, Sri Advaita, Gadadhara and Srivasa.
>|They all combined together to distribute love of Godhead
>|everywhere.
3176|Adi 17.321
3177|TEXT 321
3178|TEXT
3179|astame 'caitanya-lila-varnana'-karana
3180|eka krsna-namera maha-mahima-kathana
3181|SYNONYMS
3182|astame-in the Eighth Chapter; caitanya-lila-varnana-karana-
>|the reason for describing Caitanya Mahaprabhu's pastimes;
>|eka-one; krsna-namera-of the holy name of Lord Krsna; maha-
>|mahima-kathana-description of great glories.
3183|TRANSLATION
3184|The Eighth Chapter gives the reason for describing Lord
>|Caitanya's pastimes. It also describes the greatness of
>|Lord Krsna's holy name.
3185|Adi 17.322
3186|TEXT 322
3187|TEXT
3188|navamete 'bhakti-kalpa-vrksera varnana'
3189|sri-caitanya-mali kaila vrksa aropana
3190|SYNONYMS
3191|navamete-in the Ninth Chapter; bhakti-kalpa-vrksera-of the
>|desire tree of devotional service; varnana-the description;
>|sri-caitanya-mali-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu as the gardener;
>|kaila-did; vrksa-the tree; aropana-implantation.
3192|TRANSLATION
3193|The Ninth Chapter describes the desire tree of devotional
>|service. Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu Himself is the gardener
>|who planted it.
3194|Adi 17.323
3195|TEXT 323
3196|TEXT
3197|dasamete mula-skandhera 'sakhadi-ganana'
3198|sarva-sakha-ganera yaiche phala-vitarana
3199|SYNONYMS
3200|dasamete-in the Tenth Chapter; mula-skandhera-of the main
>|trunk; sakha-adi-of the branches, etc.; ganana-enumeration;
>|sarva-sakha-ganera-of all branches; yaiche-in what way;
>|phala-vitarana-distribution of the fruits.
3201|TRANSLATION
3202|The Tenth Chapter describes the branches and subbranches of
>|the main trunk and the distribution of their fruits.
3203|Adi 17.324
3204|TEXT 324
3205|TEXT
3206|ekadase 'nityananda-sakha-vivarana'
3207|dvadase 'advaita-skandha sakhara varnana'
3208|SYNONYMS
3209|ekadase-in the Eleventh Chapter; nityananda-sakha-of the
>|branches of Sri Nityananda Prabhu; vivarana-description;
>|dvadase-in the Twelfth Chapter; advaita-skandha-the trunk
>|known as Advaita Prabhu; sakhara-of the branch; varnana-
>|description.
3210|TRANSLATION
3211|The Eleventh Chapter describes the branch called Sri
>|Nityananda Prabhu. The Twelfth Chapter describes the branch
>|called Sri Advaita Prabhu.
3212|Adi 17.325
3213|TEXT 325
3214|TEXT
3215|trayodase mahaprabhura 'janma-vivarana'
3216|krsna-nama-saha yaiche prabhura janama
3217|SYNONYMS
3218|trayodase-in the Thirteenth Chapter; mahaprabhura-of Lord
>|Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; janma-of the birth; vivarana-the
>|description; krsna-nama-saha-along with the holy name of
>|Lord Krsna; yaiche-in what way; prabhura-of the Lord;
>|janama-the birth.
3219|TRANSLATION
3220|The Thirteenth Chapter describes the birth of Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu, which took place with the chanting of the holy
>|name of Krsna.
3221|Adi 17.326
3222|TEXT 326
3223|TEXT
3224|caturdase 'balya-lila'ra kichu vivarana
3225|pancadase 'pauganda-lila'ra sanksepe kathana
3226|SYNONYMS
3227|caturdase-in the Fourteenth Chapter; balya-lila'ra-of
>|the Lord's childhood pastimes; kichu-some; vivarana-
>|description; pancadase-in the Fifteenth Chapter; pauganda-
>|lilara-of the pastimes of the pauganda (boyhood) age;
>|sanksepe-in brief; kathana-the telling.
3228|TRANSLATION
3229|The Fourteenth Chapter gives some description of the Lord's
>|childhood pastimes. The Fifteenth briefly describes the
>|Lord's boyhood pastimes.
3230|Adi 17.327
3231|TEXT 327
3232|TEXT
3233|sodasa paricchede 'kaisora-lila'ra uddesa
3234|saptadase 'yauvana-lila' kahilun visesa
3235|SYNONYMS
3236|sodasa-sixteenth; paricchede-in the chapter; kaisora-lilara-
>|of pastimes prior to youth; uddesa-indication; saptadase-in
>|the Seventeenth Chapter; yauvana-lila-the pastimes of youth;
>| kahilun-I have stated; visesa-specifically.
3237|TRANSLATION
3238|In the Sixteenth Chapter I have indicated the pastimes of
>|the kaisora age [the age prior to youth]. In the
>|Seventeenth Chapter I have specifically described His
>|youthful pastimes.
3239|Adi 17.328
3240|TEXT 328
3241|TEXT
3242|ei saptadasa prakara adi-lilara prabandha
3243|dvadasa prabandha tate grantha-mukhabandha
3244|SYNONYMS
3245|ei saptadasa-these seventeen; prakara-varieties; adi-lilara-
>|of the Adi-lila (first canto); prabandha-subject matter;
>|dvadasa-twelve; prabandha-subject matters; tate-among those;
>| grantha-of the book; mukha-bandha-prefaces.
3246|TRANSLATION
3247|Thus there are seventeen varieties of subjects in the first
>|canto, which is known as the Adi-lila. Twelve of these
>|constitute the preface of this scripture.
3248|Adi 17.329
3249|TEXT 329
3250|TEXT
3251|panca-prabandhe panca-rasera carita
3252|sanksepe kahilun ati,-na kailun vistrta
3253|SYNONYMS
3254|panca-prabandhe-in five chapters; panca-rasera-of five
>|transcendental mellows; carita-the character; sanksepe-in
>|brief; kahilun-I stated; ati-greatly; na kailun-I did not
>|make; vistrta-expanded.
3255|TRANSLATION
3256|After the chapters of the preface, I have described five
>|transcendental mellows in five chapters. I have described
>|them very briefly rather than expansively.
3257|Adi 17.330
3258|TEXT 330
3259|TEXT
3260|vrndavana-dasa iha 'caitanya-mangale'
3261|vistari' varnila nityananda-ajna-bale
3262|SYNONYMS
3263|vrndavana-dasa-Thakura Vrndavana dasa; iha-this; caitanya-
>|mangale-in his book Caitanya-mangala; vistari'-expanding;
>|varnila-described; nityananda-of Sri Nityananda Prabhu;
>|ajna-of the order; bale-on the strength.
3264|TRANSLATION
3265|By the order and strength of Sri Nityananda Prabhu, Srila
>|Vrndavana dasa Thakura has elaborately described in his
>|Caitanya-mangala all that I have not.
3266|Adi 17.331
3267|TEXT 331
3268|TEXT
3269|sri-krsna-caitanya-lila-adbhuta, ananta
3270|brahma-siva-sesa yanra nahi paya anta
3271|SYNONYMS
3272|sri-krsna-caitanya-lila-the pastimes of Lord Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu; adbhuta-wonderful; ananta-unlimited; brahma-
>|Lord Brahma; siva-Lord Siva; sesa-Lord Sesa Naga; yanra-of
>|which; nahi-not; paya-get; anta-end.
3273|TRANSLATION
3274|The pastimes of Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu are wonderful
>|and unlimited. Even personalities like Lord Brahma, Lord
>|Siva and Sesa Naga cannot find their end.
3275|Adi 17.332
3276|TEXT 332
3277|TEXT
3278|ye yei amsa kahe, sune sei dhanya
3279|acire milibe tare sri-krsna-caitanya
3280|SYNONYMS
3281|ye yei amsa-any part of this; kahe-anyone who describes;
>|sune-anyone who hears; sei-that person; dhanya-glorious;
>|acire-very soon; milibe-will meet; tare-Him; sri-krsna-
>|caitanya-Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
3282|TRANSLATION
3283|Anyone who describes or hears any part of this elaborate
>|subject will very soon receive the causeless mercy of Sri
>|Krsna Caitanya Mahaprabhu.
3284|Adi 17.333
3285|TEXT 333
3286|TEXT
3287|sri-krsna-caitanya, advaita, nityananda
3288|srivasa-gadadharadi yata bhakta-vrnda
3289|SYNONYMS
3290|sri-krsna-caitanya-Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu; advaita-
>|Advaita Acarya Prabhu; nityananda-Nityananda Prabhu;
>|srivasa-Srivasa Thakura; gadadhara-adi-and others like
>|Gadadhara; yata-all; bhakta-vrnda-all devotees.
3291|TRANSLATION
3292|[Herein the author again describes the Panca-tattva.] Sri
>|Krsna Caitanya, Prabhu Nityananda, Sri Advaita, Gadadhara,
>|Srivasa and all the devotees of Lord Caitanya.
3293|Adi 17.334
3294|TEXT 334
3295|TEXT
3296|yata yata bhakta-gana vaise vrndavane
3297|namra hana sire dharon sabara carane
3298|SYNONYMS
3299|yata yata-each and every one; bhakta-gana-devotees; vaise-
>|reside; vrndavane-at Vrndavana; namra hana-becoming humble;
>|sire-on my head; dharon-I place; sabara-of all; carane-the
>|lotus feet.
3300|TRANSLATION
3301|I offer my respectful obeisances to all the residents of
>|Vrndavana. I wish to place their lotus feet on my head in
>|great humbleness.
3302|Adi 17.336
3303|TEXTS 335–336
3304|TEXT
3305|sri-svarupa-sri-rupa-sri-sanatana
3306|sri-raghunatha-dasa, ara sri-jiva-carana
3307|sire dhari vandon, nitya karon tanra asa
3308|caitanya-caritamrta kahe krsnadasa
3309|SYNONYMS
3310|sri-svarupa-Sri Svarupa Damodara; sri-rupa-Sri Rupa Gosvami;
>| sri-sanatana-Sri Sanatana Gosvami; sri-raghunatha-dasa-Sri
>|Raghunatha dasa Gosvami; ara-and; sri-jiva-carana-the lotus
>|feet of Sri Jiva Gosvami; sire-on the head; dhari-placing;
>|vandon-I worship; nitya-always; karon-I do; tanra-their;
>|asa-hope to serve; Caitanya-caritamrta-the book named Sri
>|Caitanya-caritamrta; kahe-describes; krsnadasa-Srila
>|Krsnadasa Kaviraja Gosvami.
3311|TRANSLATION
3312|I wish to place the lotus feet of the Gosvamis on my head.
>|Their names are Sri Svarupa Damodara, Sri Rupa Gosvami, Sri
>|Sanatana Gosvami, Sri Raghunatha dasa Gosvami and Sri Jiva
>|Gosvami. Placing their lotus feet on my head, always hoping
>|to serve them, I, Krsnadasa, narrate Sri Caitanya-
>|caritamrta, following in their footsteps.
3313|Thus end the Bhaktivedanta purports to Sri Caitanya-
>|caritamrta, Adi-lila, Seventeenth Chapter, describing the
>|pastimes of Lord Caitanya Mahaprabhu in His youth.
3314|END OF THE ADI-LILA
3315|
3316|Madhya-lila
3317|
3318| Sri Caitanya-caritamrta: Madhya-lila
3319| 1. The Later Pastimes of Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu
3320| • Translations 1–150, Translations 151–287
3321| 2. The Ecstatic Manifestations of Lord Sri Caitanya
>|Mahaprabhu
3322| • Translations 1–95
3323| 3. Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's Stay at the House of
>|Advaita Acarya
3324| • Translations 1–219
3325| 4. Sri Madhavendra Puri's Devotional Service
3326| • Translations 1–213
3327| 5. The Activities of Saksi-gopala Translations
3328| • Translations 1–161
3329| 6. The Liberation of Sarvabhauma Bhattacarya
3330| • Translations 1–150, Translations 151–286
3331| 7. The Lord's Tour of South India
3332| • Translations 1–155
3333| 8. Talks Between Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu and Ramananda
>|Raya
3334| • Translations 1–150, Translations 151–313
3335| 9. Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's Travels to the Holy
>|Places
3336| • Translations 1–180, Translations 181–365
3337| 10. The Lord's Return to Jagannatha Puri
3338| • Translations 1–190
3339| 11. The Beda-kirtana Pastimes of Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu
3340| • Translations 1–150, Translations 151–243
3341| 12. The Cleansing of the Gundica Temple
3342| • Translations 1–115, Translations 116–222
3343| 13. The Ecstatic Dancing of the Lord at Ratha-yatra
3344| • Translations 1–100, Translations 101–209
3345| 14. Performance of the Vrndavana Pastimes
3346| • Translations 1–140, Translations 141–257
3347| 15. The Lord Accepts Prasada at the House of Sarvabhauma
>|Bhattacarya
3348| • Translations 1–150, Translations 151–302
3349| 16. The Lord's Attempt to Go to Vrndavana
3350| • Translations 1–150, Translations 151–290
3351| 17. The Lord Travels to Vrndavana
3352| • Translations 1–160, Translations 161–234
3353| 18. Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu's Visit to Sri Vrndavana
3354| • Translations 1–120, Translations 121–229
3355| 19. Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu Instructs Srila Rupa
>|Gosvami
3356| • Translations 1–130, Translations 131–257
3357| 20. Lord Sri Caitanya Mahaprabhu Instructs Sanatana
>|Gosvami in the Science of the Absolute Truth
3358| • Translations 1–135, Translations 136–260, Translations
>|261–406
3359| 21. The Opulence and Sweetness of Lord Sri Krsna
3360| • Translations 1–141
3361| 22. The Process of Devotional Service
3362| • Translations 1–169
3363| 23. Life's Ultimate Goal-Love of Godhead
3364| • Translations 1–127
3365| 24. The Sixty-One Explanations of the Atmarama Verse
3366| • Translations 1–120, Translations 121–240, Translations
>|241–355
3367| 25. How All the Residents of Varanasi Became Vaisnavas
3368| • Translations 1–140, Translations 141–283
3369|